national review - belgium · 2014-08-11 · eplabel wp2: review of benchmarks and energy data in...

280
Appendix National Review - Belgium

Upload: others

Post on 09-Aug-2020

0 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

Appendix National Review - Belgium

Page 2: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM

Page 1 February 2005

EPLabel Review of energy benchmarks for occupied non-domestic buildings in six sectors

The following framework is designed to provide a structure for each Partner, sub-contractor or associated organisation to report the current situation in their country. It starts with a general overview of the availability of information about the energy used by non-domestic buildings. There is then space to detail information available about each specific sector. Preliminary remark: Belgium is a federal state that includes three regions: the Flemish Region, the Walloon Region and the Brussels-Capital Region. The population is ± 10.300.000 people (5.970.000 in the Flemish Region, 3.360.000 in the Walloon Region and 978.000 in the Brussels Region). Regulations about energy in buildings are a competence of the regions. The data provided in this report are usually given for each region. VL indicates the Flemish Region, W the Walloon Region and BXL the Brussels-Capital Region, whereas BE indicates Belgium.

Main sources of data: • Source of data for the Walloon and the Brussels-Capital Regions: The Institut de Conseil et d'Etudes en Développement Durable (ICEDD - http://www.icedd.be/) produces each year energy balances for the Walloon and the Brussels-Capital Regions. These energy balances are based on questionnaires sent to client of the energy supplier1 The author of the present report wants to gratefully thank the ICEDD for having made these energy balances available to him. Date of surveys: Walloon Region: 2002, Brussels-Capital Region: 2003 BXL: Available on http://www.ibgebim.be/ • Source of data for the Flemish Region: Energy balance produced by VITO (http://www.vito.be/). Date of survey: 2000 Available on http://www.emis.vito.be/index.cfm?PageID=86

1 In these figures, HT means High-Tension, LT means Low-tension.

Page 3: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM

Page 2 February 2005

0. General 0.1

Summary of national organisations which are responsible for or produce energy efficiency information (including benchmark data) for the design or management of non-domestic buildings • For the Walloon region and the Brussels-Capital region: Institut de Conseil et

d'Etudes en Développement Durable • For the Flemish region : VITO See details above.

0.2

Summary of national plans for implementation of the EPBD Article 7.3 (energy certificate for public display in public buildings over 1000 m2) including which organisations are responsible for developing the implementation plans. No information. Belgium is a federal state with 3 Regions. One of them, the Flemish Region, has developed a methodology to calculate the Energy Performance of new buildings. There are discussions and exchange of information with the two others Regions, in order to have a common (or very similar) methodology in the 3 Regions. However, the plan for the certification of buildings (article 7 of the EPBD) is not finalised. For residential buildings, a methodology already exists (but is not yet applied) and could be modified to comply with the EPBD requirements. Flemish Region: Certification of buildings is intended to include all public buildings (for public services) with more than 1000 m² and to be based on metered consumption.

0.3 Summary of national plans for implementation of the EPBD Article 10 (independent experts) including which organisations are involved. For residential buildings, the Flemish Region intends to have two types of experts. Experts with experience and experts without experiences. VIZO will be involved for the accreditation of experts.

0.4

Summary of arrangements for your country to review and comment on the CEN standards relating to implementation of the EPBD, soon to be released for Public comment. There is within the Belgian Standardisation committee a special commission which follows the review of the new CEN standards regarding the EPBD.

Page 4: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM

Page 3 February 2005

0.5 Prevalence of common ventilation systems in non-domestic buildings over 1,000 m²

Category Names of common systems, comments and observations A Fully Air conditioned with humidification

B Fully Air conditioned without humidification

C Mechanical ventilation (no cooling)

D Natural ventilation

E Mixed mode (mixture of mechanical and natural ventilation ie C and D)

F Local cooling eg split system for small areas used with systems C, D or E

G Top cooling (normally system C with cooling used to limit peak temperatures to say 25°C during hot weather only

H Other (please specify)

0.6 Identify common occupancy times

Possible schedules for hours of use Comments A 10 hours/day Monday – Friday only Most common. B Extended hours Monday – Friday only eg 06.00 – 21.00 C Saturday morning eg 09.00 – 13.00 D 10 hours/day Saturday E 10 hours/day Saturday and Sunday F Extended hours Saturday and Sunday G 24/7 H Other 1 (please specify) I Other 2 (please specify) 0.7 Information on current energy metering arrangements in your country

Building or parts of building to be assessed

Likely presence of dedicated main utility meters for all energy supplies to the building

Likely presence of sub-meters for fossil-fuel or heat supplies to the building or part of building

Likely presence of sub-meters for electricity supplies to the building or part of building

Individual whole building (not part of a site)

Parts of a building (occupied by different owners or tenants)

Building on a multi-building site (eg a university campus)

Other

Page 5: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM

Page 4 February 2005

Sector 1: Public administration offices 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

eg this sector covers all buildings occupied by Central and Regional/Local government administration

departments etc etc

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Town hall

Social security office

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office B open plan office C computer/server room D debating chamber E meeting room F kitchen G restaurant H reception I Other 1 (please specify) J Other 2 (please specify) K Other 3 (please specify) L Other 4 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A B C D E F G H

Page 6: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM

Page 5 February 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector

Electricity

Gas and fuel

District heating Number of answers

Units (000 m²) kWh/m² kWh/m² Public admnistration

VL: 75 W: 56 BXL: 68

VL: 213.9 W: 165 BXL: 120

VL: 50 W:119 BXL: 51

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

Page 7: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM

Page 6 February 2005

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

Energy balances from VITO and ICEDD.

5.2 Low energy design guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 8: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM

Page 7 February 2005

Sector 2: Higher education (Universities, Colleges of Further Education, etc) 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Universities HE Colleges

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office B open plan office C computer/server room D lecture theatre E meeting room F kitchen G restaurant H reception I dry sports J swimming pool K research laboratory, workshop L residential (bedrooms, etc) M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A B C D E F G H

Page 9: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM

Page 8 February 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector

Electricity

Gas and fuel

District heating Number of answers

Units (000 m²) kWh/m² kWh/m² Universities and high schools

VL: 55.6 VL: 188.9 VL: 11

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

Page 10: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM

Page 9 February 2005

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

Energy balance from VITO.

5.2 Low energy design guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 11: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM

Page 10 February 2005

Sector 3: Schools 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Primary schools Secondary Schools

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office B open plan office C computer/server room D lecture theatre E meeting room F kitchen G restaurant H reception I dry sports J swimming pool K research laboratory, workshop L residential (bedrooms, etc) M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A B C D E F G H

Page 12: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM

Page 11 February 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector

Electricity

Gas and fuel

District heating Number of answers

Units (000 m²) kWh/m² kWh/m² Schools (WL: Schools HT)

VL: 13500 VL: 30.6 W: 23 BXL: 31

VL: 197.2 W: 139 BXL: 146

VL: 122 W: 138 BXL: 42

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

Page 13: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM

Page 12 February 2005

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

Energy balances from VITO and ICEDD.

5.2 Low energy design guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 14: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM

Page 13 February 2005

Sector 4: Sports centres 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Dry sports centre Centre with swimming pool Centre with ice rink

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office B open plan office C computer/server room D lecture theatre E meeting room F kitchen G restaurant H reception I indoor dry sports J swimming pool K changing facilities L outdoor sports M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A B C D E F G H

Page 15: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM

Page 14 February 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector

Electricity

Gas and fuel

District heating Number of answers

Units (000 m²) kWh/m² * = kWh/ m² of water

kWh/m² * = kWh/ m² of water

Sports centres excluding swimming pools

VL: 108.3 VL: 244.4 VL: 36

Swimming pools VL: 177.8 VL: 958.3* W: 895* BXL:677*

VL: 719.4 VL: 4083.3* W: 3027* BXL: 2865*

VL: 44 VL: 46 W: 26 BXL: 5

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

Surface area of the swimming pool.

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

Page 16: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM

Page 15 February 2005

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

Energy balances from VITO and IDECC.

5.2 Low energy design guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 17: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM

Page 16 February 2005

Sector 5: Hospitals and other Health Facilities 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

According to statistics for the federal government, there are 219 hospitals in Belgium.

1/3 of them are multi-sites. The number of buildings is not specified, only the number of beds: ± 72000. Other health facilities are not included in this figure. According to EUROSTAT, there were 72863 hospitals beds in 2000. This number is decreasing each year. No information about how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to this sector.

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² General hospital 219 hospitals, for 72.863 beds. Day care centre Doctors’ surgery

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office B open plan office C computer/server room D lecture theatre E meeting room F kitchen G restaurant H reception I research laboratory J swimming pool K operating theatre L wards (overnight accommodation) M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector (Not discussed with any of the mentioned organisation)

Name of individual (if known)

Organisation represented

Role of organisation

A B VITO Research institute which stimulates sustainable

technological development (Flemish Region) C ICEDD Research institute which stimulates sustainable

technological development (Walloon Region) D E F

Page 18: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM

Page 17 February 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use Estimate of total

floor area for the sector

Electricity

Gas and fuel

District heating Number of answers

Units (000 m²) kWh/m² (excepted for BE)

kWh/m² (excepted for BE)

Hospitals

??? BE: 1106 MWh for 100 beds VL: 100 W: 116.7 BXL: 130

BE: 2400 MWh for 100 beds VL: 255.6 W: 219.0 BXL: 198

BE: 219 VL: 88 W: 62 BXL: 19

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

Surface or number of beds.

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy Degree-days 15/15.

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

Page 19: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM

Page 18 February 2005

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

Data 2001 from the inquiry of the FPS Health: PPT in French and Dutch: http://www.health.fgov.be/vesalius/devnew/FR/prof/regsys/statannuelle/feedback2001.pdf Energy balances from VITO and ICEDD

5.2 Low energy design guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 20: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM

Page 19 February 2005

Sector 6: Hotels and Restaurants 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Bed & breakfast Business hotel Luxury hotel

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office B open plan office C computer/server room D residential (bedrooms, etc) E meeting room F kitchen G restaurant H reception I indoor dry sports J swimming pool K retail outlets L bar M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A B C D E F G H

Page 21: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM

Page 20 February 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector

Electricity

Gas and fuel

District heating Number of answers

Units (000 m²) kWh/m² kWh/m² Hotels HT

BE: 1915 hotels

VL: 172.2 W: 102 BXL: 162

VL: 300 W: 235 BXL: 225

VL: 11 W: 17 BXL: 15

Restaurants HT

W: 175 BXL: 253

W: 377 BXL: 527

W: 10 BXL: 8

Restaurants LW

BXL: 346 BXL: 694 BXL: 18

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

Page 22: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM

Page 21 February 2005

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

Energy balances from VITO and ICEDD.

5.2 Low energy design guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 23: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM

Page 22 February 2005

Summary:

75

56

68

56

31

23

31

108

178

100

117

130

172

102

162

175

317

214

165

120

189

197

139

146

244

719

256

219

198

300

235

225

377

643

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800

Public admistration - VL

Public admistration - W

Public admistration - BXL

Universities and high schools - VL

Schools - VL

Schools - W

Schools - BXL

Sports centres excluding swimming pools - VL

Swimming pools - VL

Hospitals - VL

Hospitals - W

Hospitals - BXL

Hotels - VL

Hotels - W

Hotels - BXL

Restaurants - W

Restaurants - BXL

Electricity Gas and fuel

Year of survey are different for each Region: VL: 2000, W: 2002, BXL: 2003.

Page 24: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

Appendix National Review - Denmark

Page 25: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Denmark – Final version from July 18, 2005

Page 1 April 2005

EPLabel Review of energy benchmarks for occupied non-domestic buildings in six sectors

The following framework is designed to provide a structure for each Partner, sub-contractor or associated organisation to report the current situation in their country. It starts with a general overview of the availability of information about the energy used by non-domestic buildings. There is then space to detail information available about each specific sector. 0. General 0.1

Summary of national organisations which are responsible for or produce energy efficiency information (including benchmark data) for the design or management of non-domestic buildings The Danish Energy Authority is responsible for the two existing schemes for energy labelling. The Energy Management Scheme (ELO) is for buildings above 1500 m2, while the Energy Labelling Scheme (EM) is for buildings under 1500 m2. Both schemes are mandatory. ELO secretary (Energy Management Scheme secretary) managed by the Danish Energy Authority is responsible for the existing Energy Management Scheme. The secretary supervises and controls the work of the approved energy consultants and takes care of reported data and based on these produces annual reports for the scheme. The energy data for the sectors and the division into sub-sectors are from this annual report (February 2004). www.energiledelsesordningen.dk EM secretary (Energy Labelling Scheme secretary) managed by the Danish Energy Authority is responsible for the existing Energy Labelling Scheme. The secretary supervises and controls the work of the approved energy consultants and collects data from the labelling. www.emsekretariat.dk EIS Secretariat (Secretariat of Energy Management in the State) managed by the Danish Energy Authority is responsible for the existing Energy Management in the State. The secretary supervises and controls the work of the energy-responsible in state institutions and takes care of reported data and based on these produces annual reports. http://eis.teknologisk.dk/Statusrapport_2003_endeligt_udkast.pdf Danish Energy Authority produces a yearly statistics on energy consumption in Denmark. http://www.ens.dk/sw11654.asp Danish Electricity Companies, Natural Gas Companies and Danish District Heating produce data on electricity, heat and water consumption by the municipalities due to a yearly competition. http://www.energispare.dk/2004.html Statistics Denmark produces data on energy consumption and building mass in Denmark. www.dst.dk www.sparenergi.dk. This page is made as a supporting supplement to the Energy Label and Plan and addresses house owners with information on how to carry out energy and water saving initiatives. The association of Danish energy companies with information on Danish policies and initiatives, including links to all companies. www.danskenergi.dk

0.2

Summary of national plans for implementation of the EPBD Article 7.3 (energy certificate for public display in public buildings over 1000 m2) including which organisations are responsible for developing the implementation plans. The minister for Transport and Energy are responsible for the implementation plans. The practical preparations of the implementation are made by the Danish Energy Authority (which is a part of the ministry). The act concerning energy labelling of buildings following EPBD was proposed to the parliament by the minister for Transport and Energy in March 2005 and subsequently agreed by the parliament and

Page 26: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Denmark – Final version from July 18, 2005

Page 2 April 2005

signed by Queen Margrethe II on June 24, 2005. Link to the act (in Danish): http://www.retsinfo.dk/_GETDOC_/ACCN/A20050058530-regl_TARGET The EPBD Article 7.3 should be implemented in all public owned buildings with a total floor area above 1000 m². This is valid for the following public institutions and companies:

• Public administration. • Institutions, companies, societies etc. where expenses mainly are covered by public funds or if

they with reference to the law have authorities to make decisions on behalf of the authorities. • Companies that are owned by the authorities or where the authorities have determinative

influence. Exceptions are buildings of the Defence, embassies and other buildings where security are weighted higher that the public display of the energy certificate. Buildings rented by public institutions and companies CAN be included. The above public buildings should have a regular produced energy label displayed in a visible place for the users of the building. The minister can make rules for a different kind of display. An energy label should describe the energy state of the building and can include information about water consumption. An energy label include the following:

1. Energy label. A standardised and documented calculation of the energy state of the building under normal use of the building. Energy consumption for heating, hot water, cooling, ventilation and eventual lighting are included. Water consumption can also be included.

2. Energy plan. A documented list of energy saving measures including advise on how the energy consumption can be reduced.

3. Documentation for the energy label including other relevant information. This includes e.g. the most important assumptions for the energy label and observations made in the building during the registration of the building on site.

Energy ratings can be made in different categories for different types of buildings and types of use. The minister for Transport and Energy makes the regulations for the validity of the Energy rating. There can be different periods of validity for different categories of Energy ratings. The validity cannot exceed 10 years.

0.3 Summary of national plans for implementation of the EPBD Article 10 (independent experts) including which organisations are involved. The minister for Transport and Energy are responsible for the implementation plans. The practical preparations of the implementation are made by the Danish Energy Authority (which is a part of the ministry). The act concerning energy labelling of buildings following EPBD was proposed to the parliament by the minister for Transport and Energy in March 2005 and subsequently agreed by the parliament and signed by Queen Margrethe II on June 24, 2005. Link to the act (in Danish): http://www.retsinfo.dk/_GETDOC_/ACCN/A20050058530-regl_TARGET The minister for Transport and Energy makes the regulation for registration, approval and appointment for accredited certificates for Energy consultants and companies who employ energy consultants, including intern energy consultants and technical experts who execute control, inspection and maintenance of technical systems and companies who employ technical experts, including intern technical experts. The minister can make detailed regulations for:

• Approval, appointment, certification or registration of energy consultants and technical experts plus the companies who employ them, including qualification demands and other conditions for approval, appointment, certification or registration.

• Dispose of approval, appointment, certification or registration. • Energy consultants and technical experts obligations and impartiality including obligations for

the companies employing them. • Guidelines for energy consultants and technical experts work with energy ratings or controls,

inspections and maintenance of technical systems.

Page 27: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Denmark – Final version from July 18, 2005

Page 3 April 2005

• Demands for equipment, which is used in connection to energy ratings or controls, inspections and maintenance of technical systems.

• Organisation and administration of the schemes. • Inspection and control of the energy consultants and the technical experts plus companies who

employ them including control of the work covered by the schemes. • Access to complaints concerning work done by energy consultants and technical experts and

the companies employing them. The minister makes regulation for maximum fee for the work of the energy consultants and the technical experts. The minister also makes regulation for all other costs related to the scheme including e.g. costs of certification of consultants, courses and continuous education.

0.4

Summary of arrangements for your country to review and comment on the CEN standards relating to implementation of the EPBD, soon to be released for Public comment. As the CEN standards relating to implementation of the EPBD are released the Danish Standard Association, the Danish Energy Authority and the National Agency for Enterprise and Construction will implement the standards in the national legislation. The public as well as national experts give comments. The practical implementation is often involving a number of institutions and organisations e.g. the Danish Building Research Institute, Technical University of Denmark, Danish Building Information Center etc. Comments are given by the "public" as well as from national experts.

0.5 Prevalence of common ventilation systems in non-domestic buildings over 1,000 m²

Category Names of common systems, comments and observations A Fully Air conditioned with humidification

Not common, exist in few older office buildings and in hospitals

B Fully Air conditioned without humidification

Not common, exist in hospitals, larger hotels and some new office buildings (however – a growing number)

C Mechanical ventilation (no cooling)

Not for schools and higher education as needed. Common in office buildings and sports facilities.

D Natural ventilation

Common for all sectors

E Mixed mode (mixture of mechanical and natural ventilation i.e. C and D)

Becoming more common in new office buildings e.g. meeting rooms mechanical ventilated and offices natural ventilated

F Local cooling e.g. split system for small areas used with systems C, D or E

Common for cooling of server rooms.

G Top cooling (normally system C with cooling used to limit peak temperatures to say 25°C during hot weather only

Not common

0.6 Identify common occupancy times

Possible schedules for hours of use Comments A 10 hours/day Monday – Friday only Common in offices and schools B Extended hours Monday – Friday only e.g. 06.00 –

21.00 Common in higher education and sport centres, some schools with evening courses or community activities.

C Saturday morning e.g. 09.00 – 13.00 D 10 hours/day Saturday E 10 hours/day Saturday and Sunday Common in sport centres F Extended hours Saturday and Sunday G 24/7 Hospitals and hotels H Examples: Restaurants - opening hours can vary a lot

Page 28: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Denmark – Final version from July 18, 2005

Page 4 April 2005

Café: 09.00 – 22.00 or 09.00 – 24.00 depending on day of week. Lunch restaurant: 11.00 – 24.00 all weekdays. Dinner restaurant: 16.00 – 24.00 all weekdays.

depending on type: Café (often serve brunch), lunch + dinner restaurant, dinner restaurant. Opening hours often vary through the week e.g. with longer opening hours during Friday + Saturday.

0.7 Information on current energy metering arrangements in your country

Building or parts of building to be assessed

Likely presence of dedicated main utility meters for all energy supplies to the building

Likely presence of sub-meters for fossil-fuel or heat supplies to the building or part of building

Likely presence of sub-meters for electricity supplies to the building or part of building

Individual whole building (not part of a site)

Common Rare Rare

Parts of a building (Occupied by different owners or tenants)

Common Rare Common

Building on a multi-building site (e.g. a university campus)

Common Rare Common

Page 29: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Denmark – Final version from July 18, 2005

Page 5 April 2005

EPLabel Review of energy benchmarks for occupied non-domestic buildings in six sectors

Sector 1: Public administration offices 1 Description of sector

1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

The public administration offices covers all buildings occupied by central, regional (counties) and local

(municipalities) administration departments etc. The central government administration office buildings are all under the Palaces and Properties Agency, while the regional and local buildings are under the regional and local administration. However some public administration buildings are rented. This sector is included in the EPBD Article 7.3.

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Municipality

Buildings used by local government administration

County

Buildings used for regional government administration

State

Buildings used for central government administration

600*

*Estimated from the report “Evaluation of the energy management scheme - final report” (2001) and the report “Evaluation of the energy labelling scheme - final report” (2001). Information in these report are from BBR.

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(Excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A Cellular office Common in older buildings. Current trends are to

open plan offices. B Open plan office Common in new buildings and older buildings being

rebuild or refurbished. C Computer/server room Common in most larger buildings D Debating chamber Common in larger buildings E Meeting room Common F Kitchen In smaller buildings only for reheating, snacks etc.

In larger building for preparation of hot and cold meals

G Canteen Common in larger buildings H Reception Common in all public buildings. In buildings with

more than one occupant the reception might be shared among all users.

1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Niels Raddish Ramboll Consulting engineers. Have been involved in a large Danish survey on measured energy consumption in office buildings.

B J.C. Soerensen TI (Danish Technological Institute) Have been involved in a large Danish

Page 30: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Denmark – Final version from July 18, 2005

Page 6 April 2005

survey on measured energy consumption in office buildings.

C Ejner Jerking National Agency for Enterprise and Construction

Responsible for the Danish building regulation including implementation of EPBD in the coming regulation

D Klaus Venegaard EIS Secretariat (Secretariat of energy management in the state)

E Jon Olsen Palaces and Properties Agency Responsible for public buildings. F Dorthe Beckmann Danish Energy Authority Responsible for ELO scheme + heavily

involved in implementation of EPBD G Jens Laurtsen Danish Energy Authority Responsible for EM scheme + heavily

involved in implementation of EPBD H Erik Bundesen Dan-Ejendomme a/s Major administrator of office buildings

and other types of buildings 2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total

floor area for the sector **

Electricity***

Fossil fuel***

District heating***

Other***

Units (000 m²) kWh/m2/yr kWh/m2/yr kWh/m2/yr KWh/m2/yr Offices 3800 43 99 99 0 MWh/yr Total for sector

3800 165 380 380 0

** Estimated from the ELO benchmark report February 2004 *** From the ELO benchmark report February 2004 2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data e.g. floor area, volume, other

In the ELO scheme the following definitions for area is used Name Definition Application

Floor area Gross floor area, measured to the exterior of walls including area in use in attic, but excluding cellar. Adjoining rooms (e.g. shed, outhouse, ventilation room, balcony, terrace, etc.) are not included in the gross floor

To determine if a building is covered by ELO.

Living area Gross floor area, measured to the exterior of walls including area in use in attic and cellar. Attic area is determined as area in residential use measured in a horizontal plane 1.5 m above floor to the exterior of the

For calculation of consultants fee for domestic buildings.

Commercial area

Gross floor area, measured to the exterior of walls including area in use in attic and cellar. Attic area is determined as area in residential use measured in a horizontal plane 1.5 m above floor to the exterior of the

For calculation of consultants fee for other building types among these, public buildings and business properties.

Heated area Heated gross floor area measured to the exterior of walls, including heated attic, ½ of (unheated) cellar, and access areas e.g. stairs and lifts. The total area of the cellar that is heated is also included.

For calculation of energy labelling of a building with respect to heating consumption.

Page 31: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Denmark – Final version from July 18, 2005

Page 7 April 2005

Heated area Heated gross floor area measured to the exterior of walls, including heated attic, ½ of (unheated) cellar, and access areas e.g. stairs and lifts. The total area of the cellar that is heated is also included.

For calculation of energy labelling of a building with respect to heating consumption.

Unheated area

Unheated gross floor area measured to the exterior of walls, including unheated attic and ½ of (unheated) cellar. Shed, outhouse, garage etc.) are not included.

Total area Total area = heated area + unheated area. For calculation of energy labelling of a building with respect to electricity and water.

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation See 2.2

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy In ELO a degree day system is used, named ELO-degree days. It is based on degree-days, GD, from the Danish Technological Institute calculated from measured data taken by the Royal Veterinary and Agricultural University in Copenhagen. The starting point for the ELO method regarding the climatic correction, is that degree days among others are used in a overall comparison and levelling of yearly differences for buildings across the country. Degree-days for the previous month are published for ELO consultants on the homepage of ELO around the first week in the subsequent month. ELO-degree days for DFF-normal year and each year from 2000 to august 2004 can be seen in the table below. Year Jan Feb Mar April May June July Aug Sept Oct Nov Dec TotalDFF 519 486 444 311 154 58 22 18 91 207 341 461 3112 2000 443 383 400 229 112 85 36 32 103 165 275 396 2659 2001 461 450 469 317 129 93 9 15 124 151 357 506 3081 2002 457 360 378 278 113 35 19 0 80 301 372 524 2917 2003 509 518 412 298 142 29 8 19 81 319 292 394 3021 2004 532 431 403 258 142 83 46 13 79 211 347 400 2945

ELO-degree days for DFF-normal year and each year from 2000 to august 2004. Degree-days Dependant Consumption (GAF) and Degree-days Independent Consumption (GUF) are two central notations in the ELO degree-days system. By means of degree-days, energy consumption for space heating (Degree-days Dependant Consumption, GAF) is corrected with respect to the outside temperature. The remaining part of the energy consumption (Degree-day Independent Consumption, GUF) contains the basic consumption including domestic hot water, e.g.:

• Domestic hot water • Heat loss from re-circulation pipes for domestic hot water • Etc.

Some of these heat losses are useful for the building during the heating season. One degree day [K*24 hours] expresses a difference of 1 K between the average indoor temperature during a 24 hour day, which is set to be 17 °C, and the measured average outdoor temperature for a 24 hour day, tout,ave. GD = (17 - tout,ave)*(one 24 hour day) [K*24 hour day] The degree day corrected energy consumption is determined by:

GUF[kWh]actualyearGD

)(normalyearGDGAF[kWh]GUFnormalyearGAF[kWh]corrE +⋅=+=

3112

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available e.g. Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Page 32: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Denmark – Final version from July 18, 2005

Page 8 April 2005

Comment on pedigree e.g. sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other There are no fixed procedures for setting up scales for energy labelling, however it is stated that some of the scales are based on old VKO-data (the scheme before ELO) and some are related to the latest reported data on measured energy consumption in buildings with energy labels. The newest scales for grading the energy consumption for large buildings included in ELO can be found on the ELO web page http://www.energiledelsesordningen.dk (in Danish). Please note that the scale is updated on an annual basis to take into account the latest reported energy data. Also note that there is a different scale for different building categories. There is more than 90 different building categories covering everything from student hall to airport terminal.

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades The present Danish Building Regulation for large buildings is BR95, which will be extended with a new addendum taking EPBD into account. The addendum was approved on June 16, 2005 and will go into force on January 1, 2006 (however there will be a 3 month transitional period). Link to the new addendum (in Danish): http://www.ebst.dk/file/3346/Tillaeg_12_til_BR_95.pdf

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems E.g. heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc There is a large amount of standards dealing with everything from overall issues to very detailed issues relating to e.g. how to control and regulate heating systems. The most important standards dealing with overall issues are: DS 447 (2004) Code of Practice for Mechanical Ventilation Installations. DS 474 Code for Thermal Indoor Climate DS/CEN/CR 1752 (2001) Ventilation for Buildings – Design Criteria for the Indoor Environment DS 700 (1997) Artificial Lighting in Workrooms DS 469 (1991): Heating systems with water as heat conducting fluid. DS 469/ addendum1 (2002): Heating systems with water as the heating medium - Dimensioning and regulating of heating surfaces - Energy efficient pumps.

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies, which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1 Consumption of heat, electricity

and water in the state in 2003. Status report.

Can be downloaded on the web page http://eis.teknologisk.dk/ Danish

2005

2 Investigation of energy consumption in municipalities in 1998

Can be downloaded on the web page http://www.kl.dk/202344/ Danish

1999

3 The yearly electricity saving municipality 2004

Competition held by the electricity companies. Can be downloaded on the web page http://www.energispare.dk/2004.html

2004

4 Report on energy consumption in office buildings by Ramboll and TI

To be published during 2005. Danish

2005

5 5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 5.1.A

Energy benchmarks for existing buildings Evaluation of the energy management scheme - final report. 2001. Danish

Page 33: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Denmark – Final version from July 18, 2005

Page 9 April 2005

5.1.B 5.1.C

Can be downloaded on the web page http://ens.netboghandel.dk/ Evaluation of the energy-labelling scheme - final report. 2001. Danish Can be downloaded on the web page http://ens.netboghandel.dk/ ELO benchmark report February 2004. Danish. Can be downloaded on the web page http://www.energiledelsesordningen.dk

5.2 Low energy design guides There is a large amount of Danish design guides dealing with varies aspects of low energy design issues. Some are in overall terms describing broad aspects of energy design from orientation of the building to selection of energy effective heating plants and other are dealing with detailed design advise e.g. on how to design natural ventilation or how to design an effective artificial lighting system. Organisations who are involved in writing such guides are e.g. Danish Building Research Institute, Danish Technological Institute, Danish Technical University and varies public supported organisations or projects.

5.3 5.3.A 5.3.B 5.3.C

Energy efficiency/saving advice Effective lighting in office buildings by Danish Building Research Institute. Will be published in June 2005. www.elselskaberneidanmark.dk. Links to 8 different campaigns for electricity savings, where energy efficient equipment is listed together with advise on how to lower the electricity consumption: www.energiselskaberne.dk, www.energiguide.dk, www.energipilen.dk, www.sluknu.dk, www.sparepumpe.dk, www.sparventilator.dk, www.sparemotor.dk, www.aspare.dk Good and Energy efficient lighting – Office Lighting by the Danish Illumination Engineering Society and Lighting and Optic.

5.4 Other useful references

Page 34: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Denmark – Final version from July 18, 2005

Page 10 April 2005

EPLabel Review of energy benchmarks for occupied non-domestic buildings in six sectors

Sector 2: Higher education (Universities, Colleges of Further Education, etc) 1 Description of sector

1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

In ELO sector 2 (higher education) is combined with the sector 3 (schools), however in this review the

sector are split into two sectors. The higher education sector covers universities and research and teaching laboratories. A university often consist of a site encompassing many buildings and facilities. These establishments are owned by the state but expenditure on energy is usually delegated to the establishment itself. This sector is mainly included in the EPBD Article 7.3.

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Universities

Universities and other higher educational buildings.

Research laboratory

Laboratories used for research

Teaching Laboratory

Laboratories used for teaching

200*

*Estimated from the report “Evaluation of the energy management scheme - final report” (2001) and the report “Evaluation of the energy labelling scheme - final report” (2001). Information in these report are from BBR.

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(Excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A Cellular office Common in older buildings. Current trends are to

open plan offices. Normally used by teaching staff in universities.

B Open plan office Common in new buildings and older buildings being rebuild or refurbished. Normally used for administration staff in universities.

C Computer/server room Common in larger buildings. D Lecture theatre Common in universities E Meeting room Also used for classrooms, tutorial areas, seminar

and common room. F Kitchen Kitchen for heating of meals, snacks etc. in smaller

buildings and in larger buildings for preparation of hot and cold meals.

G Canteen Common in universities, some have more than one. Sometimes in laboratories

H Reception Common for all types. In buildings with more than one occupant the reception might be shared among all users.

I Dry sports Common in universities J Swimming pool Sometimes in universities K Research laboratory, workshop Common in universities

Page 35: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Denmark – Final version from July 18, 2005

Page 11 April 2005

L Residential (bedrooms, etc) Often on campus at universities. Includes washing facilities.

M Library Includes learning resource centres, reading room and computer labs.

1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Ejner Jerking National Agency for Enterprise and Construction

Responsible for the Danish building regulation including implementation of EPBD in the coming regulation

B Klaus Venegaard EIS Secretariat (Secretariat of energy management in the state)

C Jon Olsen Palaces and Properties Agency Responsible for public buildings. D Dorthe Beckmann Danish Energy Authority Responsible for ELO scheme + heavily

involved in implementation of EPBD E Jens Laurtsen Danish Energy Authority Responsible for EM scheme + heavily

involved in implementation of EPBD F G H 2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total

floor area for the sector**

Electricity***

Fossil fuel***

District heating***

Other***

Units (000 m²) kWh/m2/yr kWh/m2/yr kWh/m2/yr kWh/m2/yr Universities

2000 38 125 118 0

Research laboratory

475 130 241 176 0

Teaching Laboratory

525 88 198 165 0

MWh/yr Total for sector 3000 180 468 400 0 ** Estimated from the ELO benchmark report February 2004 *** From the ELO benchmark report February 2004

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data e.g. floor area, volume, other

See sector 1.

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation See sector 1.

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy See sector 1.

2.5 Other comments

Page 36: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Denmark – Final version from July 18, 2005

Page 12 April 2005

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available e.g. Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree e.g. sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other See sector 1.

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades See sector 1.

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems E.g. heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc See sector 1.

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies, which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 5.1.A 5.1.B 5.1.C

Energy benchmarks for existing buildings Evaluation of the energy management scheme - final report. 2001. Danish Can be downloaded on the web page http://ens.netboghandel.dk/ Evaluation of the energy-labelling scheme - final report. 2001. Danish Can be downloaded on the web page http://ens.netboghandel.dk/ ELO benchmark report February 2004. Danish. Can be downloaded on the web page http://www.energiledelsesordningen.dk

Page 37: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Denmark – Final version from July 18, 2005

Page 13 April 2005

5.2 Low energy design guides See sector 1.

5.3 5.3.A 5.3.B

Energy efficiency/saving advice www.elselskaberneidanmark.dk. Links to 8 different campaigns for electricity savings, where energy efficient equipment is listed together with advise on how to lower the electricity consumption www.elselskaberneidanmark.dk. Links to 8 different campaigns for electricity savings, where energy efficient equipment is listed together with advise on how to lower the electricity consumption: www.energiselskaberne.dk, www.energiguide.dk, www.energipilen.dk, www.sluknu.dk, www.sparepumpe.dk, www.sparventilator.dk, www.sparemotor.dk, www.aspare.dk

5.4 Other useful references

Page 38: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Denmark – Final version from July 18, 2005

Page 14 April 2005

EPLabel Review of energy benchmarks for occupied non-domestic buildings in six sectors

Sector 3: Schools 1 Description of sector

1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

The school sector covers all educational establishments for children aged 6-19 years. It also includes

folk high schools, which are boarding schools for adults. It does not include day care establishments for smaller children. Some schools are used for additional education activities during evening hours and hence occupancy vary from 8-15 up to 8-22. A school may consist of a single building or a site encompassing many buildings and facilities. Schools are owned by the municipality (public) and privately. The private schools receive mayor public founding and therefore will most likely be included in the EPDB Article 7.3. The expenditure on energy is delegated to the school itself. Energy consumption is usually specified for each school and not broken down by building. The sector is mainly included in the EPDB Article 7.3.

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Primary schools Day schools for children aged 6 to 16 years. The schools

are public or private. Boarding schools Schools with residential facilities for children aged 6-18.

Folk high schools for people aged 18 and above. The living quarters itself are not included, but are separately stated in sector 6.

High schools Day schools for children aged 16 – 19 years. Vocational schools

Day schools for children aged 16 – 19 years.

Other education Other schools that does not fall into one of the above categories

2900*

*Estimated from the report “Evaluation of the energy management scheme - final report” (2001) and the report “Evaluation of the energy labelling scheme - final report” (2001). Information in these report are from BBR.

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(Excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A Cellular office Principal Office B Open plan office Teachers office and classrooms for teaching C Computer/server room On most schools D Lecture theatre Rare E Multiple use room Commonly used as event room, larger meetings,

canteen F Kitchen For educational purpose on primary schools.

Preparation of hot and cold meals on boarding schools and on some high schools and vocational schools.

G Canteen At larger schools H Reception Often an open plan office for administration staff. I Dry sports Common at larger schools

Page 39: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Denmark – Final version from July 18, 2005

Page 15 April 2005

J Swimming pool Only at some schools K Research laboratory, workshop Common on most schools L Residential (bedrooms, etc) Only on boarding schools. Often with washing

facilities. The energy consumption from living quarters are not included in this sector, but in sector 6.

1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Ole Michael Jensen SBI (Danish Building Research Institute)

Experienced research organisation with deep knowledge about schools.

B Jana Eger Schroeder KL (The organisation of municipalities)

Umbrella organisation for all municipalities who are the owner of most schools.

C Ole Soegaard Aarhus Municipality Owner of many schools. Experienced in energy surveys of schools.

D E F

G H 2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total floor

area for the sector** Electricity***

Fossil fuel***

District

heating*** Other***

Units (000 m²) kWh/m2/yr kWh/m2/yr kWh/m2/yr kWh/m2/yr Primary schools

12,700 22 128 115 0

Boarding schools

1,000 34 137 114 0

High schools

1,700 30 122 105 0

Vocational schools

1,900 42 135 113 0

Other education

500 37 141 119 0

Other institution 700 47 165 125 0 MWh/yr Total for sector

18,500 502 2974 2135 0

** Estimated from the ELO benchmark report February 2004 *** From the ELO benchmark report February 2004

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data e.g. floor area, volume, other

See sector 1.

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation See sector 1.

Page 40: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Denmark – Final version from July 18, 2005

Page 16 April 2005

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy

See sector 1.

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available e.g. Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree e.g. sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other See sector 1.

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades See sector 1.

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems E.g. heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc See sector 1.

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies, which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1 Energy efficient Schools, By &

Byg results 003

Can be downloaded on the web page http://www.sbi.dk/publications Danish

2001

2 Lighting in Schools, By & Byg results 031

Can be downloaded on the web page http://www.sbi.dk/publications Danish

2004

3 Investigation of energy consumption in municipalities in 1998

Can be downloaded on the web page http://www.kl.dk/202344/ Danish

1999

4 The yearly electricity saving municipality 2004

Competition held by the electricity companies. Can be downloaded on the web page http://www.energispare.dk/2004.html

2004

5

6

7

8

9

10

Page 41: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Denmark – Final version from July 18, 2005

Page 17 April 2005

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 5.1.A 5.1.B 5.1.C

Energy benchmarks for existing buildings Evaluation of the energy management scheme - final report. 2001. Danish Can be downloaded on the web page http://ens.netboghandel.dk/ Evaluation of the energy-labelling scheme - final report. 2001. Danish Can be downloaded on the web page http://ens.netboghandel.dk/ ELO benchmark report February 2004. Danish. Can be downloaded on the web page http://www.energiledelsesordningen.dk

5.2 Low energy design guides See sector 1.

5.3 5.3.A 5.3.B

Energy efficiency/saving advice www.elselskaberneidanmark.dk. Links to 8 different campaigns for electricity savings, where energy efficient equipment is listed together with advise on how to lower the electricity consumption: www.energiselskaberne.dk, www.energiguide.dk, www.energipilen.dk, www.sluknu.dk, www.sparepumpe.dk, www.sparventilator.dk, www.sparemotor.dk, www.aspare.dk Good and Energy efficient lighting – School Lighting by the Danish Illumination Engineering Society and Lighting and Optic.

5.4 Other useful references

Page 42: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Denmark – Final version from July 18, 2005

Page 18 April 2005

EPLabel Review of energy benchmarks for occupied non-domestic buildings in six sectors

Sector 4: Sports centres 1 Description of sector

1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

The sports centres sector covers all buildings providing facilities for sport practice including dry sports,

swimming and leisure pools, fitness facilities, ice-rink, changing and bathing facilities. The centres vary enormously in size. A centre may consist of a single building or a site encompassing several buildings. Most centres are public owned, but some are privately owned. Public establishments are under the local government (municipality). This sector is mainly included in the EPDB Article 7.3.

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Sport club Separate building used by members of a sports club.

Often containing changing and bathing facilities and sometimes a sport hall for e.g. football. Sometimes also containing a small kiosk.

Dry sports centre Large building used by sports clubs to perform their sport in, often used by more than one sports club. Containing changing and bathing facilities, sport halls, fitness with exercise machines and a kiosk/café/ restaurant. Not containing swimming pool or ice rink.

Centre with swimming pool Sports centre containing facilities for water sports including changing and bathing facilities. Can also contain sport halls, fitness with exercise machines etc. Often containing a kiosk/café.

Centre with ice rink Sports centre containing facilities for ice-skating, changing facilities and kiosk/café.

Other building with sport facilities

Building containing sport facilities but doesn’t fall into the categories of clubs, dry sports centre or centre with swimming pool.

Other institution

950*

*Estimated from the report “Evaluation of the energy management scheme - final report” (2001) and the report “Evaluation of the energy labelling scheme - final report” (2001). Information in these report are from BBR. 1.3 Description of types of spaces

(Excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A Cellular office Common in larger sport clubs and centres and are

used for the management of the club/building. B Open plan office Rare, only when administration of large sports clubs

are placed in buildings with sports facilities. C Computer/server room Not common. D Lecture theatre Not common. E Meeting room Rare, only when administration of large sports clubs

are placed in buildings with sports facilities. F Kitchen Often in privately owned buildings, rarely in public

Page 43: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Denmark – Final version from July 18, 2005

Page 19 April 2005

buildings. Only used for snack preparation. G Café/Kiosk Snack area in larger buildings. In smaller buildings

combined with reception/desk. H Reception Only in large public centres. Often the reception is

combined with a kiosk in smaller buildings. I Indoor dry sports Most buildings for sports contain at least two rooms

for dry sports. The lager buildings contain several. J Swimming pool In centres with swimming pool. Mostly indoor. K Changing facilities Common in all types of buildings for sport. In larger

buildings there can be several. L Outdoor sports Common in clubs, dry sport centres and other

buildings with sport facilities. 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Jana Eger Schroeder KL (The organisation of municipalities)

Umbrella organisation for all municipalities who are the owner of most schools.

B Ole Soegaard Aarhus Municipality Owner of many schools. Experienced in energy surveys of schools.

C D

E F G H 2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total

floor area for the sector **

Electricity ***

Fossil fuel ***

District heating***

Other ***

Units (000 m²) kWh/m2/yr kWh/m2/yr kWh/m2/yr kWh/m2/yr Club

160 63 170 166 0

Dry sports centre

2050 40 107 105 0

Centre with swimming pool

800 134 349 347 0

Centre with ice rink

130 154 0 124 0

Other building with sport facilities

270 64 204 106 0

Other institution 30 82 199 206 0 MWh/yr Total for sector

3440 240 586 570 0

** Estimated from the ELO benchmark report February 2004 *** From the ELO benchmark report February 2004

Page 44: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Denmark – Final version from July 18, 2005

Page 20 April 2005

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data e.g. floor area, volume, other See sector 1.

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation See sector 1.

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy See sector 1.

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available e.g. Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree e.g. sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other See sector 1.

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades See sector 1.

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems E.g. heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc See sector 1.

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies, which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1 Investigation of energy

consumption in municipalities in 1998

Can be downloaded on the web page http://www.kl.dk/202344/ Danish

1999

2 The yearly electricity saving municipality 2004

Competition held by the electricity companies. Can be downloaded on the web page http://www.energispare.dk/2004.html

2004

3 4 5 6

7

8

9

10

Page 45: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Denmark – Final version from July 18, 2005

Page 21 April 2005

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 5.1.A 5.1.B 5.1.C

Energy benchmarks for existing buildings Evaluation of the energy management scheme - final report. 2001. Danish Can be downloaded on the web page http://ens.netboghandel.dk/ Evaluation of the energy-labelling scheme - final report. 2001. Danish Can be downloaded on the web page http://ens.netboghandel.dk/ ELO benchmark report February 2004. Danish. Can be downloaded on the web page http://www.energiledelsesordningen.dk

5.2 Low energy design guides See sector 1.

5.3 5.3.A

Energy efficiency/saving advice www.elselskaberneidanmark.dk. Links to 8 different campaigns for electricity savings, where energy efficient equipment is listed together with advise on how to lower the electricity consumption: www.energiselskaberne.dk, www.energiguide.dk, www.energipilen.dk, www.sluknu.dk, www.sparepumpe.dk, www.sparventilator.dk, www.sparemotor.dk, www.aspare.dk

5.4 Other useful references

Page 46: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Denmark – Final version from July 18, 2005

Page 22 April 2005

EPLabel Review of energy benchmarks for occupied non-domestic buildings in six sectors

Sector 5: Hospitals and other Health Facilities 1 Description of sector

1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

The hospital and health facilities sector covers all establishments for health treatment. Hospitals vary in

size from 20 to 1200 beds. An establishment may consist of a single building or a site encompassing several buildings and facilities. The facilities can be both public and private owned, however most facilities are public owned. Public owned facilities are the responsibility of the county or state. This sector is mainly included in the EPBD Article 7.3.

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Hospital without kitchen Private and public hospitals, mostly public. No

preparation of food for patients. Hospital with kitchen Private and public hospitals, mostly public.

Preparation of food for patients. Health centre Doctor’s surgery can be both public and private, but

most are public. Diagnostic and treatment centres. Dental clinic

All dental clinics are private

Animal hospital/clinic Private animal hospital or clinic Other building with health facilities

Buildings that does not fall into one of the above categories.

Other Institution

210*

*Estimated from the report “Evaluation of the energy management scheme - final report” (2001) and the report “Evaluation of the energy labelling scheme - final report” (2001). Information in these report are from BBR. 1.3 Description of types of spaces

(Excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A Cellular office In health centres each doctor normally has an office.

In hospitals administrative personnel and doctors might have either cellular offices or open plan offices. Not common in dental clinics.

B Open plan office In hospitals administrative personnel and doctors might have either cellular offices or open plan offices. Not common in dental clinics.

C Computer/server room Common D Lecture theatre Only in larger hospitals. E Meeting room Only in hospitals. F Kitchen Large kitchen for preparation of food for patients in

hospitals with kitchen. In other hospitals, health centres and dental clinics smaller kitchens for heating of food, snacks etc. for staff.

G Kiosk/Café In hospitals. H Reception Common in all health sector buildings I Research laboratory Only in larger hospitals

Page 47: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Denmark – Final version from July 18, 2005

Page 23 April 2005

J Swimming pool Not common K Operating theatre Only in hospitals and in some specialized health

centres. L Wards (overnight accommodation) Only in hospitals. In some larger hospitals both for

patients and relatives.

1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Poul-Erik Ree FSD, Foreningen af sygehusmaskinmestre i Danmark

Umbrella organisation for building managers in the hospital sector

B Kaj Jensen FSD, Foreningen af sygehusmaskinmestre i Danmark

Umbrella organisation for building managers in the hospital sector

C Amtsrådsforeningen (Society of County Council)

D Sundhedsstyrelsen (National Board of Health)

E F

G H 2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total

floor area for the sector **

Electricity ***

Fossil fuel ***

District heating***

Other ***

Units (000 m²) KWh/m2/yr kWh/m2/yr kWh/m2/yr kWh/m2/yr Hospital without kitchen 750 54 0 175 0

Hospital with kitchen 7170 72 187 168 0 Health centre No data available No data

available No data available

No data available

No data available

Dental clinic

10 53 0 94 0

Animal hospital/clinic No data available No data available

No data available

No data available

No data available

Other building with health facilities

220 46 180 200 0

Other institution 70 41 154 0 0 MWh/yr****

Total for sector 8220 570 1389 1380 0 ** Estimated from the ELO benchmark report February 2004 *** From the ELO benchmark report February 2004 ****Data are without health centres and animal hospitals/clinics 2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data e.g. floor area, volume, other

See sector 1.

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation See sector 1.

Page 48: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Denmark – Final version from July 18, 2005

Page 24 April 2005

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy See sector 1.

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available e.g. Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree e.g. sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other See sector 1.

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades See sector 1.

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems E.g. heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc See sector 1.

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies, which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1 Potential of energy savings at

hospitals – preliminary phase by FSD

2000

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 5.1.A

Energy benchmarks for existing buildings Evaluation of the energy management scheme - final report. 2001. Danish Can be downloaded on the web page http://ens.netboghandel.dk/

Page 49: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Denmark – Final version from July 18, 2005

Page 25 April 2005

5.1.B 5.1.C

Evaluation of the energy-labelling scheme - final report. 2001. Danish Can be downloaded on the web page http://ens.netboghandel.dk/ ELO benchmark report February 2004. Danish. Can be downloaded on the web page http://www.energiledelsesordningen.dk

5.2 Low energy design guides See sector 1.

5.3 5.3.A

Energy efficiency/saving advice www.elselskaberneidanmark.dk. Links to 8 different campaigns for electricity savings, where energy efficient equipment is listed together with advise on how to lower the electricity consumption: www.energiselskaberne.dk, www.energiguide.dk, www.energipilen.dk, www.sluknu.dk, www.sparepumpe.dk, www.sparventilator.dk, www.sparemotor.dk, www.aspare.dk

5.4 Other useful references

Page 50: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Denmark – Final version from July 18, 2005

Page 26 April 2005

EPLabel Review of energy benchmarks for occupied non-domestic buildings in six sectors

Sector 6: Hotels and Restaurants 1 Description of sector

1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

The hotel and restaurant sector covers all establishments for accommodation and eateries. And many

establishments in this sector will be under 1000 m2. An establishment may consist of a single building or a site encompassing many buildings and facilities. Hotel, restaurants etc. are privately owned and are therefore responsible for their own energy consumption. Energy consumption might be specified for each building, especially when it is rented out e.g. on holiday centres, camping and scout cabins. On other establishments the energy consumption is specified for the entire establishment. Hotels and restaurants are mainly not included in EPDB Article 7.3 since it is privately owned.

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Hotels and motels The larger hotels will contain restaurants and leisure

facilities. The smaller hotels and motels only contain bedrooms and a reception.

Conference centre Both with and without accommodation facilities. Often contains restaurant and leisure facilities.

Living quarters for folk high schools

Often there will be kitchen and washing facilities.

Community home Living quarters in community homes for children aged 6-18. Often there will be kitchen and washing facilities.

Youth hostel Small bedrooms. Often a kitchen is available and sometimes washing facilities.

Holiday centre Often a number of smaller buildings Camping cabin Often a number of smaller buildings Scout cabin Other accommodation

1000*

*Estimated from the report “Evaluation of the energy management scheme - final report” (2001) and the report “Evaluation of the energy labelling scheme - final report” (2001). Information in these report are from BBR. 1.3 Description of types of spaces

(Excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A Cellular office Managers office in larger establishments B Open plan office For administration staff at larger hotels, conference

centres and holiday centres C Computer/server room Common in larger establishments D Residential (bedrooms, etc) See above E Meeting room Common at larger hotels, conference centres and

community homes F Kitchen Common G Restaurant Common at larger hotels, conference centres and

holiday centres. Most hotels and motels have a breakfast room.

Page 51: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Denmark – Final version from July 18, 2005

Page 27 April 2005

H Reception Common except in scout cabins and living quarters I Indoor dry sports At larger hotels, conference centres and holiday

centres. Mostly fitness gym with exercise machines. J Swimming pool A small swimming poll at some larger hotels,

conference centres and holiday centres. K Retail outlets At hotels, conference centres, holiday centres,

youth hostels and camping cabins L Bar At some larger hotels, conference centres and

holiday centres 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Torben Kaas HORESTA The Danish employer and industry organisation of the Hotel, Restaurant and Tourism Industry.

B

C D E F G H 2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total

floor area for the sector **

Electricity ***

Fossil fuel ***

District heating***

Other ***

Units (000 m²) kWh/m2/yr kWh/m2/yr kWh/m2/yr kWh/m2/yr Hotels and motels 4160 78 146 131 0 Conference centre 2020 80 162 138 0 Living quarters for folk high schools

150 40 146 116 0

Community home

55 52 No data available

No data available

No data available

Youth hostel 80 44 No data available

123 0

Holiday centre 510 59 156 135 0 Camping cabin No data available No data

available No data available

No data available

No data available

Scout cabin No data available No data available

No data available

No data available

No data available

Other accommodation

125 41 No data available

116 0

MWh/yr **** Total for sector 7100 535 1032 935 0 ** Estimated from the ELO benchmark report February 2004 *** From the ELO benchmark report February 2004 ****Data are without under sectors with no data available

Page 52: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Denmark – Final version from July 18, 2005

Page 28 April 2005

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data e.g. floor area, volume, other See sector 1.

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation See sector 1.

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy See sector 1.

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available e.g. Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree e.g. sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other See sector 1.

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades See sector 1.

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems E.g. heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc See sector 1.

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies, which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 5.1.A 5.1.B

Energy benchmarks for existing buildings Evaluation of the energy management scheme - final report. 2001. Danish Can be downloaded on the web page http://ens.netboghandel.dk/ Evaluation of the energy-labelling scheme - final report. 2001. Danish Can be downloaded on the web page http://ens.netboghandel.dk/

Page 53: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Denmark – Final version from July 18, 2005

Page 29 April 2005

5.1.C ELO benchmark report February 2004. Danish. Can be downloaded on the web page http://www.energiledelsesordningen.dk

5.2 Low energy design guides See sector 1.

5.3 5.3.A

Energy efficiency/saving advice www.elselskaberneidanmark.dk. Links to 8 different campaigns for electricity savings, where energy efficient equipment is listed together with advise on how to lower the electricity consumption: www.energiselskaberne.dk, www.energiguide.dk, www.energipilen.dk, www.sluknu.dk, www.sparepumpe.dk, www.sparventilator.dk, www.sparemotor.dk, www.aspare.dk

5.4 Other useful references

Page 54: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

Appendix National Review - Finland

Page 55: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Finland

Page 1 April 2005

EPLabel Review of energy benchmarks for occupied non-domestic buildings in six sectors

The following framework is designed to provide a structure for each Partner, sub-contractor or associated organisation to report the current situation in their country. It starts with a general overview of the availability of information about the energy used by non-domestic buildings. There is then space to detail information available about each specific sector. 0. General 0.1

Summary of national organisations which are responsible for or produce energy efficiency information (including benchmark data) for the design or management of non-domestic buildings Ministry of Environment Ministry of Trade and Industry

0.2

Summary of national plans for implementation of the EPBD Article 7.3 (energy certificate for public display in public buildings over 1000 m2) including which organisations are responsible for developing the implementation plans. Legal adaptation is still under processing

0.3 Summary of national plans for implementation of the EPBD Article 10 (independent experts) including which organisations are involved. Legal adaptation is still under processing

0.4

Summary of arrangements for your country to review and comment on the CEN standards relating to implementation of the EPBD, soon to be released for Public comment.

Page 56: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Finland

Page 2 April 2005

0.5 Prevalence of common ventilation systems in non-domestic buildings over 1,000 m²

Category Names of common systems, comments and observations A Fully Air conditioned with humidification

B Fully Air conditioned without humidification

C Mechanical ventilation (no cooling)

D Natural ventilation

E Mixed mode (mixture of mechanical and natural ventilation ie C and D)

F Local cooling eg split system for small areas used with systems C, D or E

G Top cooling (normally system C with cooling used to limit peak temperatures to say 25°C during hot weather only

H Other (please specify)

0.6 Identify common occupancy times

Possible schedules for hours of use Comments A 10 hours/day Monday – Friday only B Extended hours Monday – Friday only eg 06.00 – 21.00 C Saturday morning eg 09.00 – 13.00 D 10 hours/day Saturday E 10 hours/day Saturday and Sunday F Extended hours Saturday and Sunday G 24/7 H Other 1 (please specify) I Other 2 (please specify) 0.7 Information on current energy metering arrangements in your country

Building or parts of building to be assessed

Likely presence of dedicated main utility meters for all energy supplies to the building

Likely presence of sub-meters for fossil-fuel or heat supplies to the building or part of building

Likely presence of sub-meters for electricity supplies to the building or part of building

Individual whole building (not part of a site)

Common

Rare

Rare

Parts of a building (occupied by different owners or tenants)

Common

Rare

Common

Building on a multi-building site (eg a university campus)

Common

Rare

Common

Other

Page 57: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Finland

Page 3 April 2005

Sector 1: Public administration offices 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

Buildings in this sector are mostly offices

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Office

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office B open plan office C computer/server room D debating chamber E meeting room F kitchen G restaurant H reception I Other 1 (please specify) J Other 2 (please specify) K Other 3 (please specify) L Other 4 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A B C D E F G H

Page 58: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Finland

Page 4 April 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating Other

Units (000 m²) kWh/m3 kWh/m3 Office

15,8 44,7

Sub-sector 3

Sub-sector 4

Total for sector

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies

Page 59: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Finland

Page 5 April 2005

Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

5.2 Low energy design guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 60: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Finland

Page 6 April 2005

Sector 2: Higher education (Universities, Colleges of Further Education, etc) 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Universities 246 Research Institute 305

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office B open plan office C computer/server room D lecture theatre E meeting room F kitchen G restaurant H reception I dry sports J swimming pool K research laboratory, workshop L residential (bedrooms, etc) M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A B C D E F G H

Page 61: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Finland

Page 7 April 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating Other

Units (000 m²) Universities

1 405 689

Research Institute

870 159

Sub-sector 3

Sub-sector 4

Total for sector

2 275 848

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies

Page 62: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Finland

Page 8 April 2005

Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

5.2 Low energy design guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 63: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Finland

Page 9 April 2005

Sector 3: Schools 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Pri & Sec schools 5651 Vocational college 1593

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office B open plan office C computer/server room D lecture theatre E meeting room F kitchen G restaurant H reception I dry sports J swimming pool K research laboratory, workshop L residential (bedrooms, etc) M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A B C D E F G H

Page 64: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Finland

Page 10 April 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating Other

Units (000 m²) Pri & Sec schools

8 835 816

Vocational college

4 345 471

Other

1 359 478

Total for sector

14 540 765

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies

Page 65: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Finland

Page 11 April 2005

Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

5.2 Low energy design guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 66: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Finland

Page 12 April 2005

Sector 4: Sports centres 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Dry sports centre 605 Centre with swimming pool 119 Centre with ice rink 167

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office B open plan office C computer/server room D lecture theatre E meeting room F kitchen G restaurant H reception I indoor dry sports J swimming pool K changing facilities L outdoor sports M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A B C D E F G H

Page 67: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Finland

Page 13 April 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating Other

Units (000 m²) Dry sports centre

2 353 150

Centre with swimming pool

305 807

Centre with ice rink

622 271

Sub-sector 4

Total for sector

3 281 228

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies

Page 68: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Finland

Page 14 April 2005

Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

5.2 Low energy design guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 69: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Finland

Page 15 April 2005

Sector 5: Hospitals and other Health Facilities 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Central hospital 103 Hospital 394 Day care centre 715

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office B open plan office C computer/server room D lecture theatre E meeting room F kitchen G restaurant H reception I research laboratory J swimming pool K operating theatre L wards (overnight accommodation) M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A B C D E F G H

Page 70: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Finland

Page 16 April 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating Other

Units (000 m²) Central hospital

1 098 632

Hospital

1 582 008

Day care centre

1 233 139

Sub-sector 4

Total for sector

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies

Page 71: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Finland

Page 17 April 2005

Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

5.2 Low energy design guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 72: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Finland

Page 18 April 2005

Sector 6: Hotels and Restaurants 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Bed & breakfast Hotel 816

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office B open plan office C computer/server room D residential (bedrooms, etc) E meeting room F kitchen G restaurant H reception I indoor dry sports J swimming pool K retail outlets L bar M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A B C D E F G H

Page 73: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Finland

Page 19 April 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating Other

Units (000 m²) Bed & breakfast

125 469

Hotel

1 678 689

Sub-sector 4

Total for sector

1 804 158

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies

Page 74: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Finland

Page 20 April 2005

Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

5.2 Low energy design guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 75: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

Appendix National Review - France

Page 76: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Sector 1: Public Administration in FR

Page 1 9-Apr-05

Sector 1: Public Administration

1 Description of sector

1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

Public administration buildings in the FR include Central Government buildings (“the Civil Estate”) and Local Authority buildings.

Central government buildings are mainly managed by different ministry with delocalised (like the Ministry of Equipment) or centralized (like the Ministry of the Interior) management policy.

Local authority buildings are usually managed by municipalities, department or region.

Municipalities have a centralized building management policy and department or region a delocalized management policy.

The main difference between a delocalised and a centralized management policy is:

- in a centralized approach the information about building energy consumption and its characteristics are usually collected and saved at a centralised level because the energy bills are paid directly by a branch of the central administration where the investment policy are defined.

- in a delocalised approach the user of the building pays directly the service charges and can decide on necessary investments so the data on buildings and its consumptions are more difficult to collect.

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors (this table currently deals with office premises only) Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of offices*

Central government offices and local authority offices

Estimation of the number of the public office buildings with a size higher than 1000 m2 for 2006.

The estimation is based on :

- The key figures of the building for the total surface heated of offices (ADEME: French Environment and Energy Management Agency)

- The sector-based guide of office buildings: Document ADEME-AICVF in the editions PYC

13,000

1.3 Description of types of spaces (excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets)

Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments to note exceptions

A Cellular office

B Open plan office

C Computer room

D lecture theatre

E meeting room

F kitchen

G Restaurant

H Reception

J Dry sports

K Swimming pool

Page 77: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Sector 1: Public Administration in FR

Page 2 9-Apr-05

L Laboratory, workshop

M Residential (bedrooms, etc)

N Council chamber

P Auditorium

R Flat floor meeting hall/ exhibition space

1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector

Name of individual Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Luc Crozier Ministry of Equipment Direction of the financial business and the general administration - Mission assets management

B Philippe Clemandot Ministry of Interior Office manager of the real-estate business of the territorial administration

C Charlotte Detaille Municipality of Paris Engineer in charge of energy management and keeping up with technological innovations

D

E

F

G

G

G

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector* 2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Needs further work, ideally a proper

workbook with all buildings

No in Average size

Estimate of total floor area for sector*

Heating and DHW

Other uses

Total Total CO2

Units NIA (m²)

(000 m²) kWh/m²/yr kWh/m²/yr kWh/m²/yr kg/m²/year

Ministry of Finance 5,059 120 50 170 Ministry of Equipment 2,888 146 54 200 Ministry of Justice 3,565 161 68 229 Ministry of Employment 434 152 57 209 Ministry of Education 846 156 55 211 Ministry of Interior 3,097 143 55 198 Ministry of Young 426 161 55 215 Ministry of Agriculture 240 137 60 197 Ministry others 1.066 149 75 224 Local Govt Offices TWh/year mtonnes/y

r Totals for sector 17,290 2.446 0.984 3.431

*CEREN Report on national level 1998. 2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data

Page 78: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Sector 1: Public Administration in FR

Page 3 9-Apr-05

kWh/m2.

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

kWh of delivered energy per square meter of heated surface

2.4 Degree day correction

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available

3.1 Describe what is available e.g. Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc

Categorise as national standard, research data or other

Each 5 years there are a national inquiry (Sofres – Energy and property holdings of council – Evolution between 1995 and 2000) commanded by ADEME (French Environment and Energy Management Agency) and AITF (Association of Engineer of French Town) about Energy consumption of municipal buildings. With this enquiry we can have access to national benchmark about energy consumption of nursery and primary schools that are managed by municipalities.

The key statistics of buildings 2004 – Commercial buildings – Education (ADEME - French Environment and Energy Management Agency).

Office Building - Programming, Design and Manage buildings with high energy performances - ADEME-AICVF, PYC edition 1993.

Energy Management in public buildings – Methodological guide ADEME 1999

Cost of operating office buildings – Apogee 2003

State Buildings Energy Consumption – CEREN 1998 & 2001

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

RT2000 (Thermal Building Regulation 2000)

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems

Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

Office Building - Programming, Design and Manage buildings with high energy performances - ADEME-AICVF, PYC edition 1993.

Guide : Energy control at municipal level – Collect of experience in several municipalities

Guide to improve the energy performance of buildings – Ministry of Equimpent-CSTB-ADEME :

http://ddd.cstb.fr/gdbat

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies

Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study.

Name of study Data available Date

1 State Buildings Energy Consumption

CEREN is mandated by different ministries to realise an enquiry each 3 years about the Energy consumption of state buildings

1998

2 Sofres – Energy and property holdings of council – Evolution

Commissioned by ADEME (French Environment and Energy Management Agency) and AITF

Page 79: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Sector 1: Public Administration in FR

Page 4 9-Apr-05

between 1995 and 2000 (Association of Engineer of French Town)

3 The key statistics of buildings 2004 Published by ADEME

5. Publications

5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

5.1A State Buildings Energy Consumption – CEREN 1998 & 2001

5.1B Sofres National Enquiry – Energy and property holdings of council – Evolution between 1995 and 2000

5.1C The key statistics of buildings 2004 – Commercial buildings – Education (ADEME - French Environment and Energy Management Agency)

Page 80: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Schools Sector in FR

Page 1 March 2005

Sector 3: Schools

1 Description of sector

1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

The stock of buildings for education is characterized by:

- its importance: it recovers a surface of 162 millions of m ² that is 20 % of the surface of the commercial sector,

- 4 % of greenhouse gas emissions in France (1998)

- its age: 80 % of the park dates of before 1980 and more particularly years 60-75

- a consumption averages of 138 kWh/m ²/year among which 123 for heating

It is necessary to distinguish the state education of the private education. For the state education the actors are:

- Municipalities for the nursery and primary schools,

- Departments for schools

- Regions for secondary schools

The energy management for the different cases are quite different:

- Confessional institutions for private sector but with a global budget including energy

- The Municipalities pay directly the energy consumptions of nursery and primary schools (they have a better view of energy bills)

- The departments and regions give a global budget including energy for schools and secondary schools (they have not a close view of energy bills in their establishments).

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of schools*

Nursery and Primary schools

It concerns 6.2 million pupils distributed in 57 789 establishments.

Buildings are rather ancient. They were built for the greater part before 1960. Their average surface is of the order of 500 m ².

Status Number of Nursery

Number of Primary

Total number

Public 18 238 33 981 52 219

Private 222 5 348 5 570

Total 18 460 39 329 57 789

The number of private establishments is marginal. They represent a little less than 15 % of elementary schools

Schools and secondary schools

Schools : - Public: It concerns 2.6 million pupils distributed in

5168 establishments. - Private: It concerns 0.71 million pupils distributed in

1803 establishments. - Surface in thousands of m ² : 18642 (67% before

1979 and 13 % from 1979 till 1990)

- The surface averages of an establishment: 6 500 m²

Page 81: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Schools Sector in FR

Page 2 March 2005

Secondary Schools :

- Public general: It concerns 1.21 million pupils distributed in 1531 establishments.

- Public professional: It concerns 0.55 million pupils distributed in 1083 establishments.

- Private general: It concerns 0.3 million pupils distributed in 1077 establishments.

- Private professional: It concerns 0.15 million pupils distributed in 647 establishments.

- Surface in thousands of m ² : 8395 (62% before 1979 and 11 % from 1979 till 1990)

- The surface averages of an establishment (Secondary School general) : 11 000 m²

- The surface averages of an establishment (Secondary School professional) : 14 500 m²

1.3 Description of types of spaces (excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets)

Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments to note exceptions

A Cellular office (eg for teachers) 4.1% of the surface (Secondary schools)

B Classrooms and other teaching space 67% of the surface (Secondary schools)

C Computer/server room Increasingly.

D lecture theatre

E meeting room

F Kitchen

G Restaurant 7.3% of the surface (Secondary schools)

H Reception

I dry sports 2.3% of the surface (Secondary schools)

J swimming pool

K teaching laboratory, workshop

L residential (bedrooms, etc) 5% staffs resident and 12.7% dormitories of the surface (Secondary schools)

M other (please specify)

1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector

Name of individual Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Philippe Tessier Association des Ingénieurs territoriaux de France

Association of 4000 engineers working for Municipalities, departments and regions. The Group Energy of this association work on HVAC systems and energy management.

http://www.aitf.asso.fr/

B Charlotte Detaille City of Paris Engineer in charge of energy management and keeping up with technological innovations

C Robert Spreng Metropolitan district of Strasbourg

Energy department of the Metropolitan district of Strasbourg

D More than 30 Engineers at municipal, Building, Energy or Environment Department

Page 82: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Schools Sector in FR

Page 3 March 2005

engineers departmental and regional level

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector 2.1 Estimate of total energy use

No schools

Ave no/ pupils

per school*

Space per

pupil**

Estimate of total

floor area for sector

Heating and DHW

Fossil fuel

CO2

Units m² (000 m²) kWh/m²/yr kWh/m²/yr kg/m²/yr

Nursery schools 18460 140 157 Primary schools 39329 100 142 Schools 6971 475 10 Secondary Schools general

2608 580 10

Secondary Schools professional

1730 400 15

TWh/year Total (mt/year) Total for sector 2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data

kWh/m2

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

kWh of delivered energy per square meter of heated surface

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy

Degree day correction

73% for heating and 27% for DHW

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available

3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc

Categorise as national standard, research data or other

Each 5 years there are a national inquiry (Sofres – Energy and property holdings of council – Evolution between 1995 and 2000) commissioned by ADEME (French Environment and Energy Management Agency) and AITF (Association of Engineer of French Town) about Energy consumption of municipal buildings. With this enquiry we can have access to national benchmark about energy consumption of nursery and primary schools that are managed by municipalities.

The key statistics of buildings 2004 – Commercial buildings – Education (ADEME - French Environment and Energy Management Agency).

Education - Programming, Design and Manage buildings with high energy performances - ADEME-AICVF, PYC edition 1993.

Energy Management in public buildings – Methodological guide ADEME 1999

Energy guide for catholic education establishment (November 2000) - FNOGEC (Fédération nationale des organismes de gestion des établissements de l’Enseignement Catholique)

Energie citée – Collection of good practices achieved for ADEME, Novembre 2001

Page 83: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Schools Sector in FR

Page 4 March 2005

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

RT2000 (Thermal Building Regulation 2000)

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems

Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

Education - Programming, Design and Manage buildings with high energy performances - ADEME-AICVF, PYC edition 1993.

Guide : Energy control at municipal level – Collect of experience in several municipalities

Guide to improve the energy performance of buildings – Ministry of Equimpent-CSTB-ADEME :

http://ddd.cstb.fr/gdbat

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies

Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study.

Name of study Data available Date

1 Sofres – Energy and property holdings of council – Evolution between 1995 and 2000

Commissioned by ADEME (French Environment and Energy Management Agency) and AITF (Association of Engineer of French Town)

2000

2 The key statistics of buildings 2004

Published by ADEME 2004

5. Publications

5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

5.1A The key statistics of buildings 2004 – Commercial buildings – Education (ADEME - French Environment and Energy Management Agency)

5.1B Sofres National Enquiry – Energy and property holdings of council – Evolution between 1995 and 2000

5.1C Guide : Energy control at municipal level – Collect of experience in several municipalities

Page 84: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Health sector in FR

Page 1 March 2005

Sector 5: Hospitals and other Health Facilities – France 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

We describe the health sector from a quantitative point of view, in capacity and in service, and from a

qualitative point of view according to the legal status and the medical disciplines. Considering the specificity of the sector we decline our approach following three aspects:

- Legal - Activity - Medical Disciplines

There are in France 4203 hospitals and others health facilities, which represents an accommodation facilities of 465 494 beds and 48019 places. They realize every year approximately 120 million hospitalizations. So 4203 French hospitals and others health facilities correspond to 1008 public legal entities and 2004 private establishments. It is difficult to estimate the number of buildings from the number of hospitals and others health facilities because:

- a legal entity represents a set of establishments on a territory - an establishments is usually made up of several buildings.

Data on estates condition is reported annually in France in: The key statistics of buildings 2004 – Commercial buildings – Health (ADEME - French Environment and Energy Management Agency). However energy information is provided on a whole-site basis (with the possibility to distinguish between heating+Domestic Hot water energy consumption and other uses), which means that breaking consumption down to particular buildings and activities within a site is usually not possible. This factor, together with the lack of submetering, may lead to difficulties in implementing the anticipated EPBD labelling methodology.

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Public legal entity which represent 65 % of beds is:

- Regional hospital establishments: they assure specialized care and common care to local population

- Hospital complexes: they are the most numerous and assure the major part of the coverage - Local hospitals: they operate with general practitioners. They assure the functions of reception

and care for old persons Private establishments which represent 35 % of beds. The total surface of the health establishments is 96 million of m2. The number of buildings over 1000 m2 is difficult to define as there is no statistic on this purpose (a legal entity represents a set of establishments on a territory and each establishments is usually made up of several buildings)

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Teaching hospital Acute hospital Cottage hospital Long stay hospital Doctors surgeries Health centres/clinics Diagnostic/treatment centres TOTAL FR ?

Page 85: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Health sector in FR

Page 2 March 2005

1.3 Description of types of spaces (excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets)

Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A Cellular office B Open plan office C Computer/server room D Lecture theatre E Meeting room F Kitchen G Restaurant H Reception I Research laboratory J Swimming pool K Operating theatre L Wards (overnight accommodation) M Other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organization

A IHF Ingénieurs Hospitaliers de France On the initiative of hospitable engineers, the Association was funded in 1956 with for main objectives:

- The creation of an alive structure of meeting, animation and pooling of experiences,

- The promotion of the technical services in the Hospital.

B Mr Avakian Assistant Public des Hôpitaux de Paris

Group in charge of technical management

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector 2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Figures based on The key statistics of buildings 2004 – Commercial buildings – Health (ADEME - French Environment and Energy Management Agency)

ENOUGH CATEGORIES?

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector

Heating and Domestic Hot water

Other uses

District heating Total CO2

Units (000 m²) (TWh/yr) (TWh/yr) (mtonnes/yr) General hospital

Day care centre

Doctors’ surgery

Sub-sector 4

Total for sector

96 000 14.88 6.432

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other kWh/m2

2.3 Definition of metric for normalization

Page 86: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Health sector in FR

Page 3 March 2005

kWh of delivered energy per square meter of heated surface

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy Degree day correction

2.5 Other comments Difficulty using benchmarks generally in the health sector due to: • wide range of activities in health sector buildings, with wide range in energy intensity • frequent change of activity type from year to year within the same building • increasing activity levels and number of energy consuming clinical equipment • problems breaking down energy use to assign to specific activities/buildings due to lack of

submetering and no recent analysis of historical data Statistical sources propose surfaces by bed (the surface varies in the cases studied between 80 and 130 m ²). The surface by bed is - 123 m² in the public - 87.5 m² in the private sector. The surface by bed in new construction (except laboratories, poles mother-child, and urgency) is of 85m ² / bed in the public and of 77 m ² by bed in the private. It could be interesting to use the indicator of kWh/bed as a specific indicator of performance for health sector.

Page 87: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Health sector in FR

Page 4 March 2005

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other Health - Programming, Design and Manage buildings with high energy performances - ADEME-AICVF, PYC edition 1993. Energy Management in public buildings – Methodological guide ADEME 1999

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades RT 2000 (Thermal Building Regulation 2000) Advices of the National mission of support for the hospitable investment -Watchdog of the hospital construction

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc Health - Programming, Design and Manage buildings with high energy performances - ADEME-AICVF, PYC edition 1993.

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1 The key statistics of buildings 2004 – Commercial buildings – Health (ADEME

- French Environment and Energy Management Agency) 2003 2004

Page 88: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Health sector in FR

Page 5 March 2005

5. Publications Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

5.2 Low energy design guides • Health - Programming, Design and Manage buildings with high energy performances - ADEME-

AICVF – 1993.

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice •

5.4 Other useful references • Panorama des établissements de santé en France, 2002, CSTB, Jean-Marie Alessandrini • Hôpitaux par Pierre Michel, Techniques de l’ingénieur, traité construction, C4 095 • Patrimoine hospitalier à travers l’Europe, un dilemme entre restructuration ou désaffectation, Pierre

Louis LAGET, conservateur du patrimoine, service régional de l’inventaire, direction régionale des affaires culturelles du Nord-Pas-de-Calais. InSitu, n°3, printemps 2003- Territoires d’inventaire. http://www.culture.gouv.fr/culture/revue-inv/insitu3/v3/text/v3.pdf

• Observatoire des recompositions hospitalières, Edouard Couty Directeur de l'hospitalisation et de l'organisation des soins http://www.recomposition-hospitaliere.net/

• Observatoire de la construction hospitalière, premier traitements sur 22 opérations publiques et privées, réalisation de l’observatoire : PERIGEE S.A, Hopital 2007, mission nationales d’appui à l’investissement hospitalier, 16 décembre 2003 http://www.mainh.sante.gouv.fr/Documents/observatoire_de_la_construction_hospitalière_dec_2003.pdf

• Observatoire de la construction hospitalière, premier traitements sur 53 opérations publiques et privées, mission nationales d’appui à l’investissement hospitalier, 01 juillet 2004. http://www.mainh.sante.gouv.fr/Documents/observatoire_de_la_construction_hospitalière_juilt_2004.pdf

• Investissements immobiliers : la baromètre, Les notes de la MAINH, n°3, ministère de la santé, de la famille et des personnes handicapées, lundi 6 janvier 2004. http://www.mainh.sante.gouv.fr/Documents/Les%20NOTES%20n°3.pdf

• Typologie des bâtiments tertiaires, secteur résidences pour personnes âgées, Jean Christophe ESCUDIE, Rofaïda LAHRECH, Pierre RICHARD, CSTB, Juin 1996, rapport ENEA/AGE-96.071RS, diffusion restreinte.

• Projet de loi de financement de la sécurité sociale pour 2005, chapitre 3 les acteurs et les structures

• Site internet des ingénieurs hospitaliers de France. Il y a une base de données avec les caractéristiques techniques des établissements notamment sur les systèmes, les puissances appelées et les consommations annuelles par fluide de l’an passé. http://www.ihf.fr/chu/

• Site Internet du programme de recherche européen présent et avenir du patrimoine hospitalier européen. http://europaphe.aphp.org/fr/home.html

Key: HSG - Health Service Guidelines HFN - Health Facilities Note GPG - Good Practice Guide GPCS - Good Practice Case Studies ECG - Energy Consumption Guide GIL - General Information Reports

Page 89: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

Appendix National Review - Germany

Page 90: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Germany

Page 1 February 2005

EPLabel Review of energy benchmarks for occupied non-domestic buildings in six sectors

The following framework is designed to provide a structure for each Partner, sub-contractor or associated organisation to report the current situation in their country. It starts with a general overview of the availability of information about the energy used by non-domestic buildings. There is then space to detail information available about each specific sector. 0. General 0.1

Summary of national organisations which are responsible for or produce energy efficiency information (including benchmark data) for the design or management of non-domestic buildings • DENA (German Energy Agency) established in 2001, has not yet started with collecting of

benchmark data of existing building. DENA is an advocate of the asset rating in Germany. Dena has yet no official role in the implementing of the EBPD in Germany

• AGES GmbH published a report on energy consumption of non-domestic buildings in 1996 and 1999. The report for the data of 2003 is under preparation. The Ages data are the only national wide available one for non-domestic buildings (for domestic buildings a lot more are available). The Ages database are mainly public buildings.

• VDI (Association of German Engineers): There exist a VDI guideline, with benchmarks for all types buildings.(VDI 3807). This guideline is based mainly on the Ages data. Extensions of this guideline is actually under preparation.

• OSCAR: Several real estate companies publish surveys on the rent and operational costs of commercial buildings. The most common survey is OSCAR of JonesLangLasalle. This study contains benchmarks as well of the additional expenses as of the total buildings costs.

0.2

Summary of national plans for implementation of the EPBD Article 7.3 (energy certificate for public display in public buildings over 1000 m2) including which organisations are responsible for developing the implementation plans. Responsible for the implementing is the German Ministry of traffic, building and housing. The implementing plan based mainly on the existing German regulation for new building (ENEV Energieeinsparverordnung/Energy saving regulation). This regulation will be extended to existing buildings. For non-residential buildings a DIN (german industrial standard) guideline (DIN 18599) has been established (Chairman Mr. Erhorn, Fraunhofer Institut Stuttgart). DIN 18599 describes the framework of an asset rating. With beginning of this year, an approach of an operational rating for public buildings has been started under the guidance of the Ministry of building.

0.3 Summary of national plans for implementation of the EPBD Article 10 (independent experts) including which organisations are involved. As far as information is available, no national plan is yet established. It seems that the independent experts will selected according to existing structures in three levels 1. Handcrafts with a special advanced training (240 h) on energy saving 2. Experts, which are listed in the national energy consulting program (supplement to a energy audit) 3. Engineers, who are listed in the regional engineers chamber for the realisation of the ENEV

certificate (actually only new buildings)

0.4

Summary of arrangements for your country to review and comment on the CEN standards relating to implementation of the EPBD, soon to be released for Public comment. The DIN 18599 was established in close coordination with the CEN organisations

Page 91: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Germany

Page 2 February 2005

0.5 Prevalence of common ventilation systems in non-domestic buildings over 1,000 m²

Category Names of common systems, comments and observations A Fully Air conditioned with humidification

Commen in high standard office buildings. Most new office buildings in the city centre. Hospitals (partly)

B Fully Air conditioned without humidification

Sometimes new buildings are build without humidification, but not very common

C Mechanical ventilation (no cooling)

Raising amount of schools and kindergarden according to the low energy or passive house standards, Some of the office buildings

D Natural ventilation

Most commen

E Mixed mode (mixture of mechanical and natural ventilation ie C and D)

F Local cooling eg split system for small areas used with systems C, D or E

Server rooms, at times in offices in single representative rooms (upper management, etc)

G Top cooling (normally system C with cooling used to limit peak temperatures to say 25°C during hot weather only

Common in new high standard office buildings

H Other (please specify)

Thermal activated ceiling

0.6 Identify common occupancy times

Possible schedules for hours of use Comments A 10 hours/day Monday – Friday only Common for offices, school less B Extended hours Monday – Friday only eg 06.00 – 21.00 C Saturday morning eg 09.00 – 13.00 D 10 hours/day Saturday E 10 hours/day Saturday and Sunday F Extended hours Saturday and Sunday G 24/7 H Other 1 (please specify) I Other 2 (please specify) 0.7 Information on current energy metering arrangements in your country

Building or parts of building to be assessed

Likely presence of dedicated main utility meters for all energy supplies to the building

Likely presence of sub-meters for fossil-fuel or heat supplies to the building or part of building

Likely presence of sub-meters for electricity supplies to the building or part of building

Individual whole building (not part of a site)

Yes Yes Yes

Parts of a building (occupied by different owners or tenants)

Yes Yes Tenants own consumption:

yes General consumption: no

Building on a multi-building site (eg a university campus)

Yes Sometimes Sometimes

Other

Page 92: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Germany

Page 3 February 2005

Sector 1: Public administration offices 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

eg this sector covers all buildings occupied by Central and Regional/Local government administration

departments etc etc 1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² higher national and federal state administration

Courthouse general Courthouse with low technical equipment

Courthouse with high technical equipment

Administration building total Administration building normal (office)

forestry office Town hall finance office administration office with additional technical use

police administration high level

police administration medium level

police station 1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office Common B open plan office Rare C computer/server room Common D debating chamber See meeting room E meeting room Common F kitchen So called “tea kitchens” are common G restaurant sometimes H reception seldom 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Carl Zeine Ages GmbH See 0.1 B Dr. Mügge VDI See 0.1 C Prof. Dr. Casties FH Coburg Carrying out studies on energy

consumption benchmarks in buildings D Dr.Ing. Uwe

Römmling Institut für Erhaltung und Modernisierung von Bauwerken e.V. an der TU Berlin

Development of actual draft of operational rating / public buildings

E Regional and national building management

Page 93: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Germany

Page 4 February 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating Other

Units (000 m²) higher national and federal state administration

38 130

Courthouse general 17 88 Courthouse with low technical equipment

15 94

Courthouse with high technical equipment

17 91

Administration building total

28 143

Administration building normal (office)

25 120

forestry office 18 151 Town hall 29 141 finance office 22 102 administration office with additional technical use

55 115

police administration high level

48 147

police administration medium level

36 129

police station 32 114 2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

Gross Floor Area, Net Floor Area, Rented Floor area, heated gross floor area (VDI) In non residential buildings no national wide binding regulation for the calculation of rented or sold floor area exists

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy Degree days (based on 15/20° degree

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other Ages and VDI (see 0.1) 1996 about 7.000 and 1999 about 11.000 buildings)

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades ENEV (see 0.2) for new buildings an major renovations

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc ENEV (see 0.2) for new buildings an major renovations

3.5 Other

Page 94: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Germany

Page 5 February 2005

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1 2 3 4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

• Ages: Verbrauchskennwerte 1996 www.ages-gmbh.de, cost about 50 Euro • Ages: Verbrauchskennwerte 1996 www.ages-gmbh.de, cost about 50 Euro • VDI Richtlinie 3807 www.vdi.de, five parts, 67,10 EUR each

5.2 Low energy design guides Huge amount of regional and local guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice Huge amount of regional and local advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 95: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Germany

Page 6 February 2005

Sector 2: Higher education (Universities, Colleges of Further Education, etc) 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

Scientific teaching and research, definition of “public building” not yet clear

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Universities HE Colleges

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office Common B open plan office No C computer/server room Common D lecture theatre Common E meeting room Common F kitchen Common G restaurant Common H reception ? I dry sports Common J swimming pool Sometimes K research laboratory, workshop Common L residential (bedrooms, etc) Sometimes M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Carl Zeine Ages GmbH See 0.1 B Dr. Mügge VDI See 0.1 C Prof. Dr. Casties FH Coburg Carrying out studies on energy

consumption benchmarks in buildings D Dr.Ing. Uwe

Römmling Institut für Erhaltung und Modernisierung von Bauwerken e.V. an der TU Berlin

Development of actual draft of operational rating / public buildings

E Building management of the federal states

Responsible for higher education

F G H

Page 96: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Germany

Page 7 February 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating Other

Units (000 m²) KWh/m²a KWh/m²a Universities

? 38 133

HE Colleges

27 110

Sub-sector 3

Sub-sector 4

Total for sector

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

Gross Floor Area, Net Floor Area, Rented Floor area, heated gross floor area (VDI) In non residential buildings no national wide binding regulation for the calculation of rented or sold floor area exists

Metric norm

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

Definition o

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy Degree days (based on 15/20° degree

Common p

2.5 Other comments

Other com

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other Ages and VDI (see 0.1) 1996 about 7.000 and 1999 about 11.000 buildings) Additional Benchmarks at the federal state administration available, not yet identified

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades ENEV (see 0.2) for new buildings an major renovations

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc ENEV (see 0.2) for new buildings an major renovations

3.5 Other

Page 97: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Germany

Page 8 February 2005

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

• Ages: Verbrauchskennwerte 1996 www.ages-gmbh.de, cost about 50 Euro • Ages: Verbrauchskennwerte 1996 www.ages-gmbh.de, cost about 50 Euro • VDI Richtlinie 3807 www.vdi.de, five parts, 67,10 EUR each

5.2 Low energy design guides German: Leitfaden Energie im Hochbau” Huge amount of regional and local guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice Huge amount of regional and local advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 98: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Germany

Page 9 February 2005

Sector 3: Schools 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Schools total without swimming hall

Schools total with swimming hall

School with sport hall School only school building School and vocational training centres

Basic secondary schools 1) Secondary school 1) Secondary modern school 1) Grammar school 1) Comprehensive school 1) Vocational school 1) Schools for handicapped children 1)

Day care centre Kindergarten 1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office no B open plan office Classroom, common C computer/server room Common (computer room D lecture theatre Rare E meeting room Rare kitchen Common G restaurant rare H reception rare I dry sports common J swimming pool sometimes K research laboratory, workshop common L residential (bedrooms, etc) seldom M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Carl Zeine Ages GmbH See 0.1 B Dr. Mügge VDI See 0.1 C Prof. Dr. Casties FH Coburg Carrying out studies on energy

consumption benchmarks in buildings

Page 99: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Germany

Page 10 February 2005

D Dr.Ing. Uwe Römmling

Institut für Erhaltung und Modernisierung von Bauwerken e.V. an der TU Berlin

Development of actual draft of operational rating / public buildings

E Matthias Linder Frankfurt building authority Head of energy management F G H

Page 100: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Germany

Page 11 February 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector

Electricity KWh/m²a

Fossil fuel KWh/m²a

District heating Other

Units (000 m²) KWh/m²a KWh/m²a Schools total without swimming hall

? 14 154

Schools total with swimming hall

? 33 143273

School with sport hall 14 167 School only school building 13 143 School and vocational training centres

21 140

Basic secondary schools 1) 11 170 Secondary school 1) 14 163 Secondary modern school 1) 14 148 Grammar school 1) 16 143 Comprehensive school 1) 18 144 Vocational school 1) 21 149 Schools for handicapped children 1)

13 164

Day care centre 19 173 Kindergarten 15 177 1) without swimming pool 2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

Gross Floor Area, Net Floor Area, Rented Floor area, heated gross floor area (VDI) In non residential buildings no national wide binding regulation for the calculation of rented or sold floor area exists

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy Degree days (based on 15/20° degree

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other • Ages and VDI (see 0.1) 1996 about 7.000 and 1999 about 11.000 buildings) • Benchmark building authority Frankfurt • A lot of other benchmarks in the local building authorities

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades ENEV (see 0.2) for new buildings an major renovations

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc ENEV (see 0.2) for new buildings an major renovations

3.5 Other

Page 101: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Germany

Page 12 February 2005

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

• Ages: Verbrauchskennwerte 1996 www.ages-gmbh.de, cost about 50 Euro • Ages: Verbrauchskennwerte 1996 www.ages-gmbh.de, cost about 50 Euro • VDI Richtlinie 3807 www.vdi.de, five parts, 67,10 EUR each • Data base Frankfurt Building authority • Data base working group local energy commissioners •

5.2 Low energy design guides Huge amount of regional and local guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice Huge amount of regional and local advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 102: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Germany

Page 13 February 2005

Sector 4: Sports centres 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

See sub-sectors 1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Gymnasium, sport hall Multi purpose hall Indoor swimming pool Sports field building Sports fields Swimming pool (out door) 1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office No B open plan office No C computer/server room No D lecture theatre No E meeting room No F kitchen No G restaurant Sometimes H reception Rare I indoor dry sports J swimming pool K changing facilities L outdoor sports M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Carl Zeine Ages GmbH See 0.1 B Dr. Mügge VDI See 0.1 C Prof. Dr. Casties FH Coburg Carrying out studies on energy

consumption benchmarks in buildings D Dr.Ing. Uwe

Römmling Institut für Erhaltung und Modernisierung von Bauwerken e.V. an der TU Berlin

Development of actual draft of operational rating / public buildings

E Horst Delp Landessportbund Hessen (Sport association Hesse

Energy management

F G H

Page 103: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Germany

Page 14 February 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating Other

Units (000 m²) Gymnasium, sport hall

178

Multi purpose hall 174 Indoor swimming pool

3506 Related to the m² pool surface!

Sports field building 411 Sports fields 274 Swimming pool (out door)

280 Related to the m² pool surface!

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

Gross Floor Area, Net Floor Area, Rented Floor area, heated gross floor area (VDI) In non residential buildings no national wide binding regulation for the calculation of rented or sold floor area exists

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy Degree days (based on 15/20° degree

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other Ages and VDI (see 0.1) 1996 about 7.000 and 1999 about 11.000 buildings) Studies of the sport association Hesse

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades ENEV (see 0.2) for new buildings an major renovations

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc ENEV (see 0.2) for new buildings an major renovations

3.5 Other

Page 104: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Germany

Page 15 February 2005

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

• Ages: Verbrauchskennwerte 1996 www.ages-gmbh.de, cost about 50 Euro • Ages: Verbrauchskennwerte 1996 www.ages-gmbh.de, cost about 50 Euro • VDI Richtlinie 3807 www.vdi.de, five parts, 67,10 EUR each

5.2 Low energy design guides Huge amount of regional and local guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice Huge amount of regional and local advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 105: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Germany

Page 16 February 2005

Sector 5: Hospitals and other Health Facilities 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Hospital 0-250 beds (basic medicare)

Hospital 251-450 beds Hospital 451-650 beds Hospital 651-1.000 beds Hospitals over 1.000 beds 1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office Rare B open plan office some C computer/server room Common D lecture theatre No E meeting room Some F kitchen Common G restaurant Common H reception Common I research laboratory Common J swimming pool Sometimes K operating theatre Common L wards (overnight accommodation) sometimes M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Carl Zeine Ages GmbH See 0.1 B Dr. Mügge VDI See 0.1 C Prof. Dr. Casties FH Coburg Carrying out studies on energy

consumption benchmarks in buildings D Dr.Ing. Uwe

Römmling Institut für Erhaltung und Modernisierung von Bauwerken e.V. an der TU Berlin

Development of actual draft of operational rating / public buildings

E Reiner Tippköter Infas Enermetric Responsible for a national wide energy benchmark pool for hospitals

F G H

Page 106: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Germany

Page 17 February 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating Other

Units (000 m²) kWh/bed and a kWh/bed and a Hospital 0-250 beds (basic medicare)

5127 24220

Hospital 251-450 beds

6354 23512

Hospital 451-650 beds

6352 26044

Hospital 651-1.000 beds

6502 25572

Hospitals over 1.000 beds

13605 41421

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

Gross Floor Area, Net Floor Area, Rented Floor area, heated gross floor area (VDI) In non residential buildings no national wide binding regulation for the calculation of rented or sold floor area exists

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy Degree days (based on 15/20° degree

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other Ages and VDI (see 0.1) 1996 about 7.000 and 1999 about 11.000 buildings) Infas Enermetric hospital energy benchmark pool

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades ENEV (see 0.2) for new buildings an major renovations

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc ENEV (see 0.2) for new buildings an major renovations

3.5 Other

Page 107: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Germany

Page 18 February 2005

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

• Ages: Verbrauchskennwerte 1996 www.ages-gmbh.de, cost about 50 Euro • Ages: Verbrauchskennwerte 1996 www.ages-gmbh.de, cost about 50 Euro • VDI Richtlinie 3807 www.vdi.de, five parts, 67,10 EUR each

5.2 Low energy design guides Huge amount of regional and local guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice Huge amount of regional and local advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 108: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Germany

Page 19 February 2005

Sector 6: Hotels and Restaurants 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Bed & breakfast Business hotel Luxury hotel

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office B open plan office C computer/server room D residential (bedrooms, etc) E meeting room F kitchen G restaurant H reception I indoor dry sports J swimming pool K retail outlets L bar M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Carl Zeine Ages GmbH See 0.1 B Dr. Mügge VDI See 0.1 C Prof. Dr. Casties FH Coburg Carrying out studies on energy

consumption benchmarks in buildings D Dr.Ing. Uwe

Römmling Institut für Erhaltung und Modernisierung von Bauwerken e.V. an der TU Berlin

Development of actual draft of operational rating / public buildings

E Paul Fay Energiereferat Stadt Frankfurt Project manager REST F G H

Page 109: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Germany

Page 20 February 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating Other

Units (000 m²) Bed & breakfast

Business hotel

Luxury hotel

Sub-sector 4

Total for sector

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

Gross Floor Area, Net Floor Area, Rented Floor area, heated gross floor area (VDI) In non residential buildings no national wide binding regulation for the calculation of rented or sold floor area exists

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy Degree days (based on 15/20° degree

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other Ages and VDI (see 0.1) 1996 about 7.000 and 1999 about 11.000 buildings) REST, Swiss research documents

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades ENEV (see 0.2) for new buildings an major renovations

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc ENEV (see 0.2) for new buildings an major renovations

3.5 Other

Page 110: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Germany

Page 21 February 2005

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

• Ages: Verbrauchskennwerte 1996 www.ages-gmbh.de, cost about 50 Euro • Ages: Verbrauchskennwerte 1996 www.ages-gmbh.de, cost about 50 Euro • VDI Richtlinie 3807 www.vdi.de, five parts, 67,10 EUR each • Rest documentation

5.2 Low energy design guides Huge amount of regional and local guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice Huge amount of regional and local advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 111: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

Appendix National Review - Greece

Page 112: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 1 February 2005

EPLabel Review of energy benchmarks for occupied non-domestic buildings in six sectors

The following framework is designed to provide a structure for each Partner, sub-contractor or associated organisation to report the current situation in their country. It starts with a general overview of the availability of information about the energy used by non-domestic buildings. There is then space to detail information available about each specific sector. 0. General 0.1

Summary of national organisations which are responsible for or produce energy efficiency information (including benchmark data) for the design or management of non-domestic buildings The Centre of Renewable Energy Sources (CRES) is signed by the Greek Government (by law 2244/94 and 2702/99) to be the National Coordinative Centre in the sectors of Renewable Energy Sources, Rational Use of Energy and Energy Saving. Within this framework, CRES acts as the supervisor of a team of experts that aims to create the infrastructure for the development of the KOHEE legislation for energy use and saving in buildings and to provide technical support for application of the KOHEE. Some of the expert teams, including the National and Kapodistrian University of Athens, Group of Building Environmental Studies, have shown further initiative in producing energy efficiency information including benchmarking data for the design or management of domestic and non-domestic buildings.

0.2

Summary of national plans for implementation of the EPBD Article 7.3 (energy certificate for public display in public buildings over 1000 m2) including which organisations are responsible for developing the implementation plans. The Hellenic Ministry for the Environment, Physical Planning and Public Works, represented by Mrs. A. Dimoudi and the Hellenic Ministry of Development, represented by Mr. Nomidis, in cooperation with the Hellenic Ministry of Economy are all together responsible for developing plans and implementing the EPBD in our country. At this moment decisions are being made on very important issues regarding the implementation of the EPBD and all practical issues including the integration of CEN standards within the KOHEE legislation, which is still under construction. According to the above- mentioned Ministries, implementation will be achieved by 4/1/2006.

0.3 Summary of national plans for implementation of the EPBD Article 10 (independent experts) including which organisations are involved. Not stated yet. The Hellenic Ministry of Development is responsible for this action.

0.4

Summary of arrangements for your country to review and comment on the CEN standards relating to implementation of the EPBD, soon to be released for Public comment. ELOT, the official national agency member of CEN has technical committees on specific relative issues such as space heating, electrical lamps, building construction and thermal insulation. Moreover, a team of the Hellenic Ministry of the Environment is already concerned with reviewing and commenting the CEN standards.

0.5 Prevalence of common ventilation systems in non-domestic buildings over 1,000 m²

Category Names of common systems, comments and observations A Fully Air conditioned with humidification

Can be found only in major and new buildings of the 6 sectors. Though the system may be available, it is not in all cases applied.

B Fully Air conditioned without humidification

Can be found only in major and new buildings of the 6 sectors. Though the system may be available, it is not in all cases applied.

C Mechanical ventilation (no cooling)

Can be found in all 6 sectors, always in combination with natural ventilation.

D Natural ventilation

Very common for all 6 sectors, sometimes in combination with other systems.

E Mixed mode (mixture of mechanical and natural ventilation ie C and D)

Very common in all 6 sectors. Mixed mode switches between different systems in same zone on diurnal or seasonal basis and it considers a mixture of mechanical ventilation and natural ventilation.

Page 113: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 2 February 2005

F Local cooling eg split system for small areas used with systems C, D or E

Very common for all 6 sectors. Most common for cellular offices, hotel rooms etc. in combination with natural or mechanical ventilation. Also, sometimes used in order to deal with local hot spots such as server rooms.

G Top cooling (normally system C with cooling used to limit peak temperatures to say 25°C during hot weather only

Very rare

H Mixture of natural ventilation (system D) with central cooling used to limit hot weather temperatures.

Very common. Not found in sport facilities and public schools. The systems switch in same zone on diurnal or seasonal basis.

0.6 Identify common occupancy times

See also each sector separately for more details Possible schedules for hours of use Comments A 10 hours/day Monday – Friday only Most common for schools, thought

occupancy may vary from 6 to 12 hours, Monday to Friday only, starting always at 08.00.

B Extended hours Monday – Friday only eg 06.00 – 21.00 Most common for higher education C Saturday morning eg 09.00 – 13.00 D 10 hours/day Saturday E 10 hours/day Saturday and Sunday F Extended hours Saturday and Sunday G 24/7 Most common for hospitals and health

facilities. Also common for hotels, only these may be seasonal occupancy hours!

H 8 hours/day Monday – Friday 07.00-15.00 Public administration offices I Monday – Sunday 12.00. – 02.00 Restaurants J Monday – Sunday, a few hours per day Occupancy hours of sport facilities vary a lot

though Saturday, Sunday and evening use is more common. Some sport facilities only open for special events.

0.7 Information on current energy metering arrangements in your country

Building or parts of building to be assessed

Likely presence of dedicated main utility meters for all energy supplies to the building

Likely presence of sub-meters for fossil-fuel or heat supplies to the building or part of building

Likely presence of sub-meters for total electricity supplies to the building or part of building

Individual whole building (not part of a site)

100%

100% 100%

Parts of a building (occupied by different owners or tenants)

90% 0% 90%

Building on a multi-building site (eg a university campus)

90% 90% 90%

Page 114: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 3 February 2005

Sector 1: Public administration offices 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

This sector covers all buildings occupied by Central and Regional/Local government administration

departments. All Greek government administration buildings are owned and financed by the State. In Greece, the sector includes town halls, prefectures, ministries, port authorities, custom services, police agencies, post offices, social security offices, public economy services, inland revenues, institutions of social insurances, national telecommunication services, offices of the public enterprise of electricity, parliaments, registry offices, district attorneys, consulates, country courts, the fund of deposits, the court of appeal, the national statistics agency, libraries and many more. The exact number of state owned buildings is lacking, as there is a continuous shift of spaces and state property covers much more than is being used for administrative purposes. Public administration buildings vary enormously in age, form, size, occupancy, maintenance, systems and types of spaces, making it difficult to categorize them. There is one common thing though, which is that most of these buildings are closed for public after 15.00 Monday – Friday and all weekend. Studies on the energy profile of office buildings include public administration offices, though data is not specifically split down to this category. Perhaps the main issue that needs to be addressed in order to apply EPBD Article 7.3 is public procurement guidelines and procedures related to energy use; more specifically, the current situation discourages long-term planning while not preventing high operational costs.

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Total sector No data available 1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office Common B open plan office Common C computer/server room Depends on the function D debating chamber Depends on the function E meeting room Depends on the function F Kitchen A separate small room, often named kitchen, with a

refrigerator and a coffee machine, may be available in many buildings.

G Restaurant Rare. H Reception Not common, maybe concierge I Other 1 (please specify) Rarely library, laboratory, parking space, health

centres, car services, press room, editorial room

Page 115: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 4 February 2005

1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Ministry of Internal Affairs and Public Administration

B Ministry of Economy & Finance 2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use1

Estimate of

average floor area for the

sector

Other electricity

Heating Cooling Lighting

Units (m²) kWh/m²/yr kWh/m²/yr kWh/m²/yr kWh/m²/yr Total for sector 19512 60 85 34 25 2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

Floor area 2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

Heated floor area in m². 2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy

The common procedure for weather normalisation of heating energy is the DD method, while the procedure for normalisation of cooling is the CSI as described below.

1. The heating – cooling degree-day method (DDM): the concept primarily builds on the temperature difference between a base indoor temperature and the outdoor temperature, multiplied by the duration of the temperature difference. The length of heating and cooling season is pre-determined as is the base indoor temperature.

2. The climate severity index (CSI): an index of the relative influence of the climate on the heating consumption of a building. The absolute climatic influence on the heating or cooling requirements of a building depends on the building characteristics, but the relative climatic influence is quite independent of factors such as quality of the envelope, window to wall ratio or orientation of the building. The only significant factor remaining is the use of the building mainly due to internal gains. Assuming that buildings corresponding to the same sector have a similar value for internal gains it is possible to calculate the CSI corresponding to each sector for a certain geographic area.

2.5 Other comments

1 Ministry of industry, research, technology and trade, Greek Centre of Productivity: Saving energy on office buildings, final report, April 1992 2 It is worth noting that the average office surface area is not a typical value; Greece is characterised by a majority of very small offices and a small minority of very big corporate headquarters. The standard deviation of the sample is also very high.

Page 116: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 5 February 2005

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other Through research study on 186 offices in Greece, an energy rating and benchmarking reference has been developed for office buildings, as given below.

Typical, Best Practice and Passive benchmarks have been defined, Typical as being the median value of sample (50%), Best Practice as being the quartile boundaries (25%) and Passive as being the 5% of the sample. Values are given in kWh of floor area for fossil fuel, cooling, lighting and other electricity. The benchmarking information is obtained either from energy bills or from direct meter readings. All fuels are entered as kWh. The area of the school given in square metres, is the heated floor area as described above. The heating – cooling degree-day method (DDM) is used for weather normalisation of heating, while for cooling, the CS index is used. The buildings have been categorized into air conditioned and non air-conditioned.

85,27

33,9625,48

60,09

0 20 40 60 80 100

kWh/m2/yr

Energy consumption of office buildings

Other electricityLightingCoolingHeating

0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140

1

2

3

4

5

6Non Air Conditioned Offices

Typical

Passive

Best Practice

Best Practice

Passive

Typical

Air Conditioned Offices

0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140

1

2

3

4

5

6Non Air Conditioned Offices

Typical

Passive

Best Practice

Best Practice

Passive

Typical

Air Conditioned Offices

Page 117: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 6 February 2005

Consumption for Heating (kWh/m²/yr) 

Offices  Air conditioned Non air 

conditioned 

Typical  85  63 

Good practice  49  35 

Passive standard  8  16 

Electrical Energy Consumption (kWh/m²/yr) 

Offices  Air conditioned Non air 

conditioned 

Typical  100  32 

Good practice  60  15 

Passive standard  30  3 

Energy Consumption for Lighting (kWh/m²/yr) 

Offices  Air conditioned Non air 

conditioned Typical  24  18 

Good practice  17  7 

Passive standard  5  2 

Consumption for Cooling (kWh/m²/yr) 

Offices  Air conditioned 

Typical  108 

Good practice  103 

Passive standard  1 

Page 118: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 7 February 2005

0

A

B

C

D

E

Hea

ting

( kW

h/m

2 /y)

Heating + Cooling +Lighting (kWh/m2/y)

50

50

100

100

150

150

200

200

250

250

300

350

350

400

400500 300450

All Offices

A/C

N/V

0

A

B

C

D

E

Hea

ting

( kW

h/m

2 /y)

Heating + Cooling +Lighting (kWh/m2/y)

50

50

100

100

150

150

200

200

250

250

300

350

350

400

400500 300450

All Offices

A/C

N/V

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

350

400H

eatin

g (k

Wh /

m2/

y )

0

Heating +Lighting (kWh/m2/y)

50100150200250350400 300450

N/V Offices

A

BC

D

ETypical N/V buildingBest Practice N/V Passive N/V Building

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

350

400H

eatin

g (k

Wh /

m2/

y )

0

Heating +Lighting (kWh/m2/y)

50100150200250350400 300450

N/V Offices

A

BC

D

ETypical N/V buildingBest Practice N/V Passive N/V Building

Page 119: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 8 February 2005

A/C Offices

0

A

Hea

ti ng

(kW

h /m

2/y )

50

100

150

200

250

300

350

400

0

Heating + Cooling +Lighting (kWh/m2/y)

50100150200250350400500 300450

B

C

D

ETypical A/C buildingBest Practice A/C Passive A/C Building

A/C Offices

0

A

Hea

ti ng

(kW

h /m

2/y )

50

100

150

200

250

300

350

400

0

Heating + Cooling +Lighting (kWh/m2/y)

50100150200250350400500 300450

B

C

D

ETypical A/C buildingBest Practice A/C Passive A/C Building

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades Technical Instructions of the Technical Chamber of Greece 2423/86, 2425/86

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc Technical Instructions of the Technical Chamber of Greece 2423/86, 2425/86

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Language 1 Ministry of industry, research, technology and

trade, Greek Centre of Productivity: Energy use and saving in office buildings, school buildings, commercial buildings, hospitals and hotels, Athens 1992

Greek

2 Ministry of industry, research, technology and trade, Greek Centre of Productivity: Saving energy on office buildings, final report, April 1992

Energy data of 186 office buildings

Greek

3 Energy retrofitting of office buildings, M. Santamouris, May 1995

English

Page 120: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 9 February 2005

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 M. Santamouris, A. Argiriou, E. Daskalaki, C. Balaras and A. Gaglia: Energy Characteristics and

Savings Potential in Office Buildings, Solar Energy, Vol 52, 1, 1994 5.2 A. Argiriou, D. Asimakopoulos, C. Balaras, E. Daskalaki, A. Lagoudi, M. Loizidou, M. Santamouris and

I. Tselepidaki: On the Energy Consumption and Indoor Quality in Office and Hospital Buildings in Athens, Hellas. Journal Energy Conversion and Management, 335, 5, 385394, 1994

5.3 Lagoudi A., Loizidou M., Santamouris M. And Asimakopoulos D.N.: Symptoms experienced and environmental factors and energy consumption in office buildings, Journal of Energy and Buildings, 24, p.p. 237-243, 1996

Page 121: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 10 February 2005

Sector 2: Higher education (Universities, Colleges of Further Education, etc) 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

SECTOR WILL SOON BE REVIEWED. WAITING FOR STUDY RESULTS The sector of Higher Education covers all educational establishments, private or public, for people

aged above 17 who have a minimum background of finished secondary school. Public academic education consists out of the Highest Educational Institutions (Universities), the Technical Education Institutes (Technical Colleges), the Military, Police and Fire Academies and other Higher Education establishments like Centres and Institutions of Vocational Training. According to the Ministry of National Education and Religion, there are 19 Universities spread over 27 cities (237 departments), 1 National Open University, 14 Technical Education Institutes spread over 30 cities (176 departments), 2 faculties of tourism professions and 10 Military, Police or Fire Academies. Moreover, according to the National Accreditation Centre of Continuing Vocational Training (EKEPIS), the number of accredited Centres of Vocational Training is 278. Private education consists out of private Universities, Academies, Technical Schools or Laboratories of enormous diversity, so that it is difficult to define the number and energy details of private educational institutions. A University or College or Academy may consist of a single building or a site encompassing more buildings or may even occupy different sites encompassing more buildings. Occupancy hours are from 08.00-18.00 and sometimes up to 22.00. Energy consumption is usually specified per school establishment at one site i.e. not broken down by building. Public Universities and Technical Schools fall under the supervision of the Ministry for National Education and Religion, although expenditure on energy is usually delegated to the school establishment itself.

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Public Universities 200 Public Technical Education Institutes

140

Public Academies 10 Centres of Professional Training (KEK).

50

Institutions of Professional Training (IEK).

0

Private educational institutions

?

Page 122: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 11 February 2005

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office Common B open plan office Common C computer/server room Common D Lecture theatre Common E meeting room Common F Kitchen Common for preparation of small snacks and

preheating G Canteen Common H Restaurant Common. Not in KEK’s and IEK’s I Reception Not common J dry sports Sometimes, in major establishments K swimming pool Sometimes, in major establishments L research laboratory, workshop Common M residential (bedrooms, etc) Not common in Greece at all. N Shops, post offices, bank offices Common in major public establishments O Pressroom, printing office Sometimes P Library Common Q Photographic studio Sometimes 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of

individual (if known)

Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Ministry of National Education and Religion

B National Accreditation Centre of Continuing Vocational Training

The National Accreditation Centre for continuing Vocational Training (EKEPIS) was founded under the Law 2469/1997 (O .G 38A/14-03-1997) and the Presidential Decree No 67 (O.G 61A/ 21-4-1997. EKEPIS is a statutory body supervised by the Ministry of Employment and Social Protection with administrative and financial autonomy. The Center's mission is to develop and implement the National Accreditation System for Continuing Vocational Training. This system aims at quality assurance in vocational training, linkage between initial and continuing vocational qualifications and recognition of vocational qualifications provided via continuing vocational training.

C Ministry of Employment and Social Protection

Page 123: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 12 February 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating Other

Units (000 m²) Total for sector Not yet obtained 2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

Floor area 2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

Heated floor area in m². 2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy

The common procedure for weather normalisation of heating energy is the DD method, while the procedure for normalisation of cooling is the CSI as described below.

1. The heating – cooling degree-day method (DDM): the concept primarily builds on the temperature difference between a base indoor temperature and the outdoor temperature, multiplied by the duration of the temperature difference. The length of heating and cooling season is pre-determined as is the base indoor temperature.

2. The climate severity index (CSI): an index of the relative influence of the climate on the heating consumption of a building. The absolute climatic influence on the heating or cooling requirements of a building depends on the building characteristics, but the relative climatic influence is quite independent of factors such as quality of the envelope, window to wall ratio or orientation of the building. The only significant factor remaining is the use of the building mainly due to internal gains. Assuming that buildings corresponding to the same sector have a similar value for internal gains it is possible to calculate the CSI corresponding to each sector for a certain geographic area.

2.5 Other comments 3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other Not yet obtained

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades Technical Instructions of the Technical Chamber of Greece 2423/86, 2425/86

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc Technical Instructions of the Technical Chamber of Greece 2423/86, 2425/86

3.5 Other

Page 124: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 13 February 2005

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1 Energy study on the campus of the National Technical

University of Athens within the framework of the European SAVE programme “Guidelines for the improvement of energy efficiency in the European University Campus”, 2002

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1

Page 125: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 14 February 2005

Sector 3: Schools 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

Education in Greece is obligatory for all children aged 6-15 but actual school life starts at the age of 2,5

with nursery schools and finishes at the age of 18 with the higher secondary education. So, the ‘schools’ sector covers all educational establishments for children aged from 2,5 to 18, that is nurseries, primary schools and (both lower and higher) secondary schools. It does not include open playgrounds and child minders. A school establishment may consist of a single building or a site encompassing more buildings. A building may accommodate different school establishments during the day, while some school buildings are often used for additional education activities during evening hours. Occupancy hours vary from 08.00-14.00 up to 08.00-22.00. According to data derived from the National Statistic Agency of Greece (December 2000) there are about 16,800 school buildings in Greece. A good estimation is that about 6,900 of these buildings (±41%) have a floor area >1,000 m². The number of school establishments amounts to 6,500. Energy consumption is usually specified per school establishment i.e. not broken down by building. A school may be public or private owned. Public school establishments fall under the supervision of the Ministry for National Education and Religion; the actual buildings are the responsibility of the School Buildings Organisation, although expenditure on energy is usually delegated to the school establishment itself. School sizes vary enormously according to the number of pupils. A public nursery is often accommodated within classrooms of a primary school building and averages 20 pupils, whereas primary schools average 190 pupils and secondary schools 275 pupils. The most common ventilation system for school buildings is natural ventilation combined with split air conditioning units in offices. Sometimes also ceiling fans in classrooms.

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total

number of buildings

Estimate of total

number of buildings

over 1,000 m²

Nursery schools Daytime nurseries for children aged 3 to 5, often offering sleeping facilities.

Primary schools Day schools for children aged 6 to 12. Many primary schools also have nursery classes for children aged 3 to 5.

Secondary Schools Day schools for children aged 13 to 18.

16,800 6,900

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A Principal’s office Cellular office, in cases where a building

accommodates two schools there are two principals offices.

B Teachers’ office Open plan offices, in cases where a building accommodates two schools there are two different teachers’ offices.

C computer/server room Probably available in about 50% of secondary schools at the moment and increasing.

Page 126: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 15 February 2005

D multiple use room Commonly used as gym room and event room E Classroom Number varies between min. 6 and max. 20 F Kitchen In larger schools; offering re-warming of snacks G Restaurant Only in private schools H Canteen Almost always available I dry sports Most common in private schools J swimming pool Rare, only in some private schools K research laboratory, workshop Secondary schools only 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Mr. P. Patargias The School Buildings Organisation S.A. B Ministry of National Education and Religion 2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Number

of schools

Average floor area

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector Electricity Lighting

Fossil fuel

Units (m²) (m²) (kWh/m²/yr) (KWh/m²/yr) (kWh/m²/yr)

Total for the sector 6,500 1,105 7,183,755 26 17 65

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

Floor area 2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

Heated floor area in m². 2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy

The common procedure for weather normalisation of heating energy is the DD method, while the procedure for normalisation of cooling is the CSI as described below.

1. The heating – cooling degree-day method (DDM): the concept primarily builds on the temperature difference between a base indoor temperature and the outdoor temperature, multiplied by the duration of the temperature difference. The length of heating and cooling season is pre-determined as is the base indoor temperature.

2. The climate severity index (CSI): an index of the relative influence of the climate on the heating consumption of a building. The absolute climatic influence on the heating or cooling requirements of a building depends on the building characteristics, but the relative climatic influence is quite independent of factors such as quality of the envelope, window to wall ratio or orientation of the building. The only significant factor remaining is the use of the building mainly due to internal gains. Assuming that buildings corresponding to the same sector have a similar value for internal gains it is possible to calculate the CSI corresponding to each sector for a certain geographic area.

2.5 Other comments 3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other

Page 127: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 16 February 2005

There is a benchmarking reference for schools, delivered trough research data, currently available through the University of Athens, Physics Department, Group of Building Environment.

It is a comprehensive guide for managing energy in existing schools as well as a tool for rating the energy use of school buildings related to typical, best practice and passive references. Typical, Best Practice and Passive benchmarks are given for kWh/m² of school floor area for fossil fuel, electricity and lighting. Values are calculated based on energy records from 290 schools across Greece.

Typical is median value of sample (50%), Best Practice is quartile boundaries (25%) and Passive is 5% of the sample.

The benchmarking information is obtained either from energy bills or from direct meter readings. All fuels are entered as kWh. The area of the school given in square metres, is the heated floor area as described above. The heating – cooling degree-day method (DDM) is used for weather normalisation.

Schools Heating (kWh/m²) Energy (kWh/m²) Lighting (kWh/m²)

T (50%) 54 20 11

BP (25%) 31 9 5

Passive (5%) 13 2 1

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70

1

2

3

Schools

Passive

Best Practice

Typical

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70

1

2

3

Schools

Passive

Best Practice

Typical

Page 128: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 17 February 2005

AB

C

D

E

Hea

ting

( kW

h/m

2 /y)

Electricity (kWh/m2/y)

Schools

Typical School buildingBest Practice School Passive School Building

AB

C

D

E

Hea

ting

( kW

h/m

2 /y)

Electricity (kWh/m2/y)

Schools

Typical School buildingBest Practice School Passive School Building

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

Technical Instructions of the Technical Chamber of Greece 2423/86, 2425/86 3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems

Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc Technical Instructions of the Technical Chamber of Greece 2423/86, 2425/86

3.5 Other 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Language Data available Date 1. Ministry of industry, research, technology and trade,

Greek Centre of Productivity: Energy use and saving in office buildings, school buildings, commercial buildings, hospitals and hotels, Athens 1992

Greek

2. Ministry of industry, research, technology and trade, Greek Centre of Productivity: Saving energy on school buildings, final report, University of Athens, Group of Building Environment, July 1992

Greek

3 National and Kapodistrian University of Athens, Diploma Thesis, Study on the energy use of school buildings and the application of renewable energy sources.

Greek

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 M. Santamouris, E. Daskalaki, C. Balaras, a. Argiriou and A. Gaglia: Energy Consumption and the

Potential for Energy Conservation in School Buildings in Hellas. Journal Energy, 19,6,653-660, 1994 5.2 A. Synnefa, E. Polichronaki, E. Papagiannopoulou, M. Santamouris, G. Mihalakakou, P. Doukas, P.A.

Page 129: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 18 February 2005

Siskos, E. Bakeas, A. Dremetsika, A. Geranios, A. Delakou: An experimental investigation of the indoor air quality in fifteen school buildings in Athens, Greece, Journal Ventilation, 2004

Page 130: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 19 February 2005

Sector 4: Sports centres 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

The sector ‘sports centres’ in Greece may include:

• Public open air or indoor sporting facilities like national or municipal dry sports centers, stadiums, swimming pools and playing / sport fields

• The 35 new or renewed Olympic competition venues • Major private gyms, swimming pools and playing/ sport fields. Smaller private sport facilities and centres like dancing schools, private gyms, karate schools, riding facilities, yachting clubs etc. are not taken into consideration due to the enormous diversity. The majority of sport facilities in Greece are either municipal or state owned, while a small percentage is owned by sport associations. Most sport centres are located in the Athens greater area and were built over the last 20 years. The buildings are usually simple constructions and are equipped with a simple space and water heating system, if any. The great majority of sport halls are not air-conditioned. Some sport centres have also been built in other Hellenic cities. Their overall characteristics are similar to the ones found in Athens. Sports facilities include, in addition to the to the main sports hall area, a number of other facilities like dressing rooms with shower facilities, training rooms, lavatories, managerial offices, storage spaces, mechanical rooms, general use office spaces for meetings, medical rooms, press and TV-radio facilities etc.

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate total

number of buildings

Estimate average

floor area (m2)

Total area (m²)

Estimate of number of buildings

over 1,000 m²

Sport halls generally3

The category covers indoor national, municipal or private dry sport centers and athletic centers excluding any indoor Olympic facilities

463 1,500 555,000 370

Indoor Special facilities3

30 1,100 33,000 30

Indoor swimming pools4

Used for official races, diving, water polo and recreation

29 2,800 81,200 29

Outdoor swimming pools

Estimation 15 Not available Not available 12

Ice rings5 2 1800 3600 2 National stadiums5 128 Not

available Not available 128

National shooting ranges5

2 Not available Not available 0

National ski centers5 2 Not available Not available 0

3 E. Trianti – Stourna, K. Spiropoulou, C. Theofilaktos, K. Droutsa, C.A. Balaras, M. Santamouris, D.N. Asimakopoulos, G. Lazaropoulou and N. Papanikolaou: Energy conservation strategies for sports centers: Part A. Sports halls. Journal Energy and Buildings, 27, p.p.123-135, 1998 4 E. Trianti – Stourna, K. Spiropoulou, C. Theofilaktos, K. Droutsa, C.A. Balaras, M. Santamouris, D.N. Asimakopoulos, G. Lazaropoulou and N. Papanikolaou: Energy conservation strategies for sports centers: Part B. Swimming pools. Journal Energy and Buildings, 27, p.p.123-135, 1998 5 GGA

Page 131: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 20 February 2005

National marine athletic centers6

4 Not available Not available 0

Olympic competition venues7

35 Not available

Not available 35

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office Common B open plan office Not common, only found in Olympic venues C computer/server room Not common, only found in Olympic venues D lecture theatre Not common E meeting room Common F Kitchen Not common G Canteen Sometimes H Restaurant Not common, only found in some Olympic venues I Reception/foyer Sometimes J indoor dry sports In indoor venues K Swimming pool In swimming centres L changing facilities, including showers Common M outdoor sports In playing fields N press and TV-radio facilities Sometimes O shops Not common P Medical room Sometimes, certainly in Olympic venues Q Parking facilities Often, certainly in Olympic venues R Residential Very rare, only found in few Olympic venues 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of

individual (if known)

Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Ministry of Culture Person in charge for the planning and policy making in the sports field is the Deputy Minister of Culture with competence on issues of Sports, who oversees also the General Secretariat of Sports

B Helenic Ministry of Sports, General Secretariat of Sports (G.G.A.).

6 YPETHA 7 Athens 2004

Page 132: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 21 February 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of average floor area for the

sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

Total

Units (m²) KWh/m²/yr KWh/m²/yr KWh/m²/yr Sport halls8 1,500 37 322 73 Swimming pools9 2,800 57 1094 450 2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

Floor area 2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

Heated floor area in m². 2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy

The common procedure for weather normalisation of heating energy is the DD method, while the procedure for normalisation of cooling is the CSI as described below.

1. The heating – cooling degree-day method (DDM): the concept primarily builds on the temperature difference between a base indoor temperature and the outdoor temperature, multiplied by the duration of the temperature difference. The length of heating and cooling season is pre-determined as is the base indoor temperature.

2. The climate severity index (CSI): an index of the relative influence of the climate on the heating consumption of a building. The absolute climatic influence on the heating or cooling requirements of a building depends on the building characteristics, but the relative climatic influence is quite independent of factors such as quality of the envelope, window to wall ratio or orientation of the building. The only significant factor remaining is the use of the building mainly due to internal gains. Assuming that buildings corresponding to the same sector have a similar value for internal gains it is possible to calculate the CSI corresponding to each sector for a certain geographic area.

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other Based on the energy data of 23 sport facilities, a first draft calculation of reference values is as follows:

Electric (kWh/m²) Heating (kWh/m²) T (50%) 34 52 BP(25%) 26 35 Passive (5%) 14 0

8 E. Trianti – Stourna, K. Spiropoulou, C. Theofilaktos, K. Droutsa, C.A. Balaras, M. Santamouris, D.N. Asimakopoulos, G. Lazaropoulou and N. Papanikolaou: Energy conservation strategies for sports centers: Part A. Sports halls. Journal Energy and Buildings, 27, p.p.123-135, 1998 9 E. Trianti – Stourna, K. Spiropoulou, C. Theofilaktos, K. Droutsa, C.A. Balaras, M. Santamouris, D.N. Asimakopoulos, G. Lazaropoulou and N. Papanikolaou: Energy conservation strategies for sports centers: Part B. Swimming pools. Journal Energy and Buildings, 27, p.p.123-135, 1998

Page 133: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 22 February 2005

0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200

kWh/m2/yr

Electricity

Fossil fuel

Total

Energy consumption of sports facilities

swimming poolssport halls

Typical is median value of sample (50%), Best Practice is quartile boundaries (25%) and Passive is 5% of the sample, whereas all 23 sport facilities are considered independent of their use. The benchmarking information is obtained either from energy bills or from direct meter readings. In order to compare energy consumption between different heated swimming pools, the Normalized Performance Indicator (NPI) is used. The method normalizes actual energy consumption data, for different floor area, location, weather conditions, buildings exposure and hours of use. Local weather information is accounted for using data on Degree Days on a 15.5 C base. NPI is calculated by taking the ratio of the corrected annual energy use to the total pool floor area.

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades Technical Instructions of the Technical Chamber of Greece 2423/86, 2425/86

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc Technical Instructions of the Technical Chamber of Greece 2423/86, 2425/86

3.5 Other 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Language Date 1 Energy Conservation Strategies for Sports Centers, Vol 1:

Energy Efficiency and Indoor Quality Guidelines English

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 E. Trianti – Stourna, K. Spiropoulou, C. Theofilaktos, K. Droutsa, C.A. Balaras, M. Santamouris, D.N.

Asimakopoulos, G. Lazaropoulou and N. Papanikolaou: Energy conservation strategies for sports centers: Part A. Sports halls. Journal Energy and Buildings, 27, p.p.123-135, 1998

5.2 E. Trianti – Stourna, K. Spiropoulou, C. Theofilaktos, K. Droutsa, C.A. Balaras, M. Santamouris, D.N. Asimakopoulos, G. Lazaropoulou and N. Papanikolaou: Energy conservation strategies for sports centers: Part B. Swimming pools. Journal Energy and Buildings, 27, p.p.123-135, 1998

Page 134: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 23 February 2005

Sector 5: Hospitals and other Health Facilities 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

The sector of health facilities in Greece covers all public or private health care facilities like hospitals,

clinics and health centres. Private medical doctors’ facilities and detoxification clinics have not been included. According to data derived from the National Statistic Agency of Greece (December 2000) the total number of buildings used for health purposes (hospitals and clinics) in Greece would be 1,961.

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings over

1,000 m² Public hospitals10 144 Public hospitals are owned by the State, operate on a 24

hour basis and include patients rooms. Medical care is free for all citizens.

Private hospitals or clinics10 195 establishments in total. Health Centres10 180 in total. The Centres of Health provide first degree

medicine and dentistry care, exercise preventive and therapeutic medicine and dental care, provide family, work and school medicine planning, hospitalisation and follow-up of patients in the recovery stage (after hospital exit), medication and social care to citizens that reside permanently or temporarily in the region of responsibility of the Health Centre. Health centres operate on an extended working hour schedule.

Military Hospitals11 There are 11 hospitals belonging to the Greek Military forces (7 belonging to the Greek Military force, 3 belonging to the Greek navy and 1 belonging to the Greek air force)

Not available

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office Common B open plan office Common C computer/server room Common D lecture theatre Common E meeting room Common F Kitchen Common G Restaurant Common in hospitals, less common in health

centres and private clinics H Reception Common I research laboratory Common J swimming pool Not found K surgery room Common in hospitals L wards (overnight accommodation) Common is hospitals, less common in health

centres M Intensive care Common in hospitals N Parking Sometimes 10 National Statistic Agency of Greece (1999) 11 Ypetha: The Greek ministry of National Defense

Page 135: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 24 February 2005

1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector

Name of individual (if known)

Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Ministry of Health and Social Solidarity

B Ministry of National Defence 2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Lighting Heating Cooling Electrical/

equipment Total

Units (KWh/m²/yr) (KWh/m²/yr) (KWh/m²/yr) (KWh/m²/yr) (KWh/m²/yr) Hospitals12 52 (12.8%) 299 (73.4 %) 3 (0.8%) 53 (13%) 407 Clinics12 26 (9.4%) 180 (65.3%) 48 (17.6%) 21 (7.7%) 275 2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

Floor area 2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

Heated floor area in m². 2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy

The common procedure for weather normalisation of heating energy is the DD method, while the procedure for normalisation of cooling is the CSI as described below.

1. The heating – cooling degree-day method (DDM): the concept primarily builds on the temperature difference between a base indoor temperature and the outdoor temperature, multiplied by the duration of the temperature difference. The length of heating and cooling season is pre-determined as is the base indoor temperature.

2. The climate severity index (CSI): an index of the relative influence of the climate on the heating consumption of a building. The absolute climatic influence on the heating or cooling requirements of a building depends on the building characteristics, but the relative climatic influence is quite independent of factors such as quality of the envelope, window to wall ratio or orientation of the building. The only significant factor remaining is the use of the building mainly due to internal gains. Assuming that buildings corresponding to the same sector have a similar value for internal gains it is possible to calculate the CSI corresponding to each sector for a certain geographic area.

2.5 Other comments No data available

12 M. Santamouris, A. Argiriou, E. Daskalaki, C. Balaras and A. Gaglia : Energy Performance and Energy Conservation in Health Care Buildings in Hellas. Journal Energy Conversion and Management, 35, 4, p.p. 293-305, 1994

Page 136: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 25 February 2005

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other Data delivered from extensive energy audit of 33 health care buildings in Hellas (24 hospitals and 9 clinics)13

0 50 100 150 200 250 300

kWh/m2/yr

Lighting

Heating

Cooling

Electrical/

Annual energy consumption of hospitals and clinics

ClinicsHospitals

Hospitals Thermal (kWh/m²)

Electrical (kWh/m²)

Total Energy (kWh/m²)

T (50%) 265 87 345

BP (25%) 97 27 200

Passive (5%) 15 5 75

Clinics Thermal (kWh/m²)

Electrical (kWh/m²)

Total Energy (kWh/m²)

T (50%) 150 27 175

BP (25%) 44 12 75

Passive (5%) 36 0 17

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades Technical Instructions of the Technical Chamber of Greece 2423/86, 2425/86

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc Technical Instructions of the Technical Chamber of Greece 2423/86, 2425/86

3.5 Other

13 M. Santamouris, A. Argiriou, E. Daskalaki, C. Balaras and A. Gaglia : Energy Performance and Energy Conservation in Health Care Buildings in Hellas. Journal Energy Conversion and Management, 35, 4, p.p. 293-305, 1994

Page 137: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 26 February 2005

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Language Date 1 Ministry of industry, research, technology and trade,

Greek Centre of Productivity: Energy use and saving in office buildings, school buildings, commercial buildings, hospitals and hotels, Athens 1992

Greek

2 Survey of occupational problems and risks related to indoor conditions in hospitals operating rooms, Final report, Athens November 1999

English

3. Survey of occupational problems and risks related to indoor conditions in hospitals operating rooms, Code of Practice, Athens November 1999

English

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 M. Santamouris, A. Argiriou, E. Daskalaki, C. Balaras and A. Gaglia : Energy Performance and Energy

Conservation in Health Care Buildings in Hellas. Journal Energy Conversion and Management, 35, 4, p.p. 293-305, 1994

5.2 A. Argiriou, D. Asimakopoulos, C. Balaras, E. Daskalaki, A. Lagoudi, M. Loizidou, M. Santamouris and I. Tselepidaki: On the Energy Consumption and Indoor Quality in Office and Hospital Buildings in Athens, Hellas. Journal Energy Conversion and Management, 335, 5, 385394, 1994

5.3 M. Santamouris, C.A. Balaras, E. Daskalaki, A. Argiriou and A. Gaglia : Energy Conservation and Retrofitting Potential in Hellenic Hotels. Journal Energy and Buildings, 24, 1, p.p. 65-76, 1996.

5.4 A. Argiriou, D. Asimakopoulos, C. Balaras, E. Daskalaki, A. Lagoudi, M. Loizidou, M. Santamouris, I. Tselepidaki: Indoor air quality and occupants health symptoms in office and hospital buildings in Athens, Greece, Journal Energy Conversion and Management, 1993

Page 138: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 27 February 2005

Sector 6: Hotels and Restaurants 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

According to the National Statistic Agency of Greece (December 2000) the number of buildings used

for hotel purposes amounts to 22,830. The official data of the Hellenic chamber of Hotels names 8,900 hotel units (601,034 beds). There are also 28,000 rental units registered (420,000 beds) and 351 camping facilities (31,000 camping stands). The ‘hotels’ sector covers all tourist accommodation facilities including, low budget, economy, business and luxury hotels, camping’s, bungalows, bed & breakfast facilities, rooms to let, hostels, motels, etc. The size, number of beds, completeness and occupational timetables of every facility, may vary enormously, considering seasonal occupation. Tourism is very season depended. It is registered that 67% of the occupation is found between June and September while no less than 92% of the occupation is found between April and October. Tourism is localized in specific areas. The 5 areas (South Aegean, Crete, Ionian Islands, Attica and Central Macedonia) having the highest tourist motion have very different climates. The ‘restaurants’ sector covers all public catering facilities. The sector covers taverns, restaurants and entertainment places serving food. Sizes and occupational timetables vary enormously, considering seasonal occupation, catering for anywhere between 20 and 1,000 people. The specific number of restaurants in Greece is not registered. Notice that a restaurant in most cases forms part of a greater building, which has other specific use purposes, like a restaurant within a hospital or a restaurant within a university etc.

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors14

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of

buildings over 1,000 m²

Camping There are about 351 camping facilities in Greece offering about ±31,000 camping stands. There are no big buildings involved.

0

Rental units These are usually small units of accommodation facilities, offering only rooms to let.

0

Bungalows Bed & breakfast Low budget hotel units Hostels Motels Economy hotels Business hotels Luxury hotels

The total number of hotel buildings amounts to 22,830. There are 8,900 hotel units officially registered. Luxury hotel facilities cover only 6 % of the total number while 44 % concerns low budget hotel units. Characteristic of the hotel market is the small average size of the units. Only a very small percentage (mostly the luxury hotels) has a floor area >1,000 m².

600

Taverns Restaurants Entertainment

No data available

14 Ministry of Development, Tourism Policy, 2002-2006

Page 139: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 28 February 2005

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office Only in luxury accommodation facilities C computer/server room Only in luxury accommodation facilities D residential (bedrooms, etc) Always E meeting room Sometimes, in business or luxury hotels F kitchen In all types of hotels G restaurant In all types of hotels H reception In all types of hotels I indoor dry sports Only in luxury or major hotels J swimming pool Only in luxury or major hotels K retail outlets Only in luxury or major hotels L bar Only in luxury or major hotels M laundrette Only in luxury or major hotels N hairdressers Only in luxury or major hotels O shops Only in luxury or major hotels P Music facilities Sometimes Q Conference rooms About 460 officially registered in luxury or major

hotels R garage Often found at business of luxury hotels 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of

individual (if known)

Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Ministry of Tourism B Greek National Tourism

Organisation The Greek National Tourism Organisation (GNTO) is a Public Entity (PE) supervised by the Ministry of Tourism.

C Hellenic chamber of hotels

The Hellenic chamber of hotels is the official state consultant concerning issues of tourism. All the hotels operating legally in Greece are members of the Hellenic Chamber of Hotels, which compromises more than 8,200 hotels in actual operation. It is also a member of the National Union of Hotels Confederation of the countries members of the European Union (Hotrec).

D Tourism Development Co.

Tourism Development Co. is a leading Greek real estate asset manager, acting in between the Public & Private sector in order to assure optimal property development, contributing thus to meeting tourism property goals. The Company's main scope of activity is to manage and administrate the state-owned tourism property while securing optimal development through modern financial techniques that promote the synergies between the State and the private sector (Private Public Partnerships' strategies).

E The Organization of Tourism Education and Training

The Organization of Tourism Education and Training constitute the specialised state organization, which provides tourism education and training in Greece. They operate as Legal Entities of Public law supervised by the Ministry of Development.

Page 140: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 29 February 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use Delivered from energy studies on 140 hotels and 22 restaurants situated in the Athens area. The samples are not typical for other regions of Greece.

Average floor area

Total energy use

Electricity/ equipment

Heating

Lighting Cooling Cooking

Units m² KWh/m²/yr KWh/m²/yr KWh/m²/yr KWh/m²/yr KWh/m²/yr KWh/m2/yr Hotels 15 3,268 273 40 (14.6%) 198 (72%) 24 (9%) 11 (4%) Restaurants16 537 415 1952 2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

Floor area 2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

Heated floor area in m². 2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy

The common procedure for weather normalisation of heating energy is the DD method, while the procedure for normalisation of cooling is the CSI as described below.

1. The heating – cooling degree-day method (DDM): the concept primarily builds on the temperature difference between a base indoor temperature and the outdoor temperature, multiplied by the duration of the temperature difference. The length of heating and cooling season is pre-determined as is the base indoor temperature.

2. The climate severity index (CSI): an index of the relative influence of the climate on the heating consumption of a building. The absolute climatic influence on the heating or cooling requirements of a building depends on the building characteristics, but the relative climatic influence is quite independent of factors such as quality of the envelope, window to wall ratio or orientation of the building. The only significant factor remaining is the use of the building mainly due to internal gains. Assuming that buildings corresponding to the same sector have a similar value for internal gains it is possible to calculate the CSI corresponding to each sector for a certain geographic area.

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other There is a benchmarking reference and tool for rating the energy use of hotel buildings, developed by the University of Athens, Physics Department, Group of Building Environment, based on an energy study of 140 hotels across Greece.

It is a comprehensive guide for managing energy in existing hotels as well as a tool for rating the energy use of hotel buildings related to typical, best practice and passive references. Typical, Best Practice and Passive benchmarks are given for kWh/m² for fossil fuel, electricity, lighting and cooling. Typical is median value of sample (50%), Best Practice is quartile boundaries (25%) and Passive is 5% of the sample.

The benchmarking information is obtained either from energy bills or from direct meter readings. All fuels are entered as kWh. The area of the hotel given in square metres, is the heated floor area as described above. The heating – cooling degree-day method (DDM) is used for weather normalisation on heating and the CSI index on cooling. Notice that the sample used in the study is situated in and around the greater Athens area, which means that the occupation is all year round.

15 M. Santamouris, C.A. Balaras, E. Daskalaki, A. Argiriou, A. Gaglia: Energy conservation and retrofitting potential in Hellenic hotels, Journal Energy and Buildings, 1995 16 Energy study on 22 restaurants within the framework of the European programme “Energy efficient kitchens – leading the way to sustainable production” (4.1031/Z/101/2002)

Page 141: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 30 February 2005

Heating Energy Consumption 

  Insulated Hotels With 

Air Conditioning 

 Insulated Hotels With No Air 

Conditioning

Non Insulated Hotels With 

Air Conditioning

Non Insulated Hotels With No Air Conditioning 

Typical Value 

(kWh/m2/yr) 

146  133  182  125 

Good Practice 

Value 

(kWh/m2/yr) 

86  60  91  68 

Passive Standard 

(kWh/m2/yr) 

69  76  57  46 

No. Of Buildings  23  19  19  79 

Electrical Energy Consumption 

  Insulated Hotels With

 Insulated Hotels With

Non Insulated

Non Insulated Hotels With No Air Conditioning 

Typical Value 

(kWh/m2/yr) 

83  48  73  53 

Good Practice  37  38  57  33 

Passive Standard 

(kWh/m2/yr) 

69  76  57  46 

Page 142: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 31 February 2005

 

Insulated Hotels With 

Air Conditioning

 Insulated Hotels With No Air 

Conditioning

Non Insulated Hotels With 

Air Conditioning

Non Insulated Hotels With No Air Conditioning 

Typical Value 

(kWh/m2/yr) 20  25  26.3  20 

Good Practice 

Value 

(kWh/m2/yr) 

13.5  12.7  19  13 

Passive Standard 

(kWh/m2/yr) 

68,7  76,5  57,2  45,9 

No. Of Buildings 

23  19  19  79 

Energy Consumption for Cooling 

 Insulated Hotels  

Non Insulated Hotels  

Typical Value 

(kWh/m2/yr) 12  25 

Good Practice 

Value 

(kWh/m2/yr) 

3  7 

Passive Standard 

(kWh/m2/yr) 

69  57 

No. Of Buildings 

23  19 

Page 143: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 32 February 2005

A/C HotelsE

D

C

BA

Typical buildingBest Practice Passive Building

Hea

t ing

(kW

h/m

2/y)

Heating + Cooling +Lighting (kWh/m2/y)

A/C HotelsE

D

C

BA

Typical buildingBest Practice Passive Building

Hea

t ing

(kW

h/m

2/y)

Heating + Cooling +Lighting (kWh/m2/y)

0 50 100 150 200 250

1

2

3

4

5

6Non Air Conditioned Hotels

Typical

Passive

Best Practice

Best Practice

Passive

Typical

Air Conditioned Hotels

Page 144: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 33 February 2005

An energy study on 22 restaurants in and around the area of Athens has provided data on energy consumption for restaurants. The study has shown that for restaurants the determinant metric unit for energy consumption is the number of dishes prepared. For this reason, the data is given not only per floor area but also per number of dishes prepared. Important thing to mention here is that the energy consumption is determined by the use for cooking. For cooking purposes mostly gas and electricity are used. The heating consumption, mostly electrical and sometimes fossil fuel is relatively very small and is not considered separately in this study. The functional hours of Greek restaurants vary from 8 to 22 hours per day with an average of 13 hours. The number of dishes prepared, vary from 20 to 2,000 a day, with an average of 236 dishes per day.

Gas distribution for restaurants

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

400 800 1200 1600 2000 2400 2800 3200 3600 4000

Energy consumption kWh/m2/yr

Perc

enta

ge o

f res

taur

ants

E

D

CB

A

Typical buildingBest Practice Passive Building

N/V Hotels

Hea

ting

(kW

h/m

2 /y)

Heating +Lighting (kWh/m2/y)

E

D

CB

A

Typical buildingBest Practice Passive Building

N/V Hotels

Hea

ting

(kW

h/m

2 /y)

Heating +Lighting (kWh/m2/y)

Page 145: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 34 February 2005

Electricity distribution for restaurants

020406080

100120

100

200

300

400

500

600

700

800

900

1000

1100

1200

Electricity consumption kWh/m2/yr

Perc

enta

ge o

f res

taur

ants

0 500 1000 1500 2000

kWh/m2/yr

gas

electricity

Energy consumption of restaurants

Passive (5%)

Best Practice(25%)Typical (50%)

Average

Energy distribution

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

Energy consumption per dish (kWh/dish)

Perc

enta

ge o

f re

stau

rant

s

Page 146: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 35 February 2005

0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0

kWh/dish

Average

Typical

Best Practice

Passive

Energy benchmarks for restaurants

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

Technical Instructions of the Technical Chamber of Greece 2423/86, 2425/86 3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems

Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc Technical Instructions of the Technical Chamber of Greece 2423/86, 2425/86

3.5 Other 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Language Date 1 Ministry of industry, research, technology and trade, Greek

Centre of Productivity: Saving energy on hotel buildings, final report, University of Athens, Group of Building Environment, September 1992.

Greek

2 Ministry of industry, research, technology and trade, Greek Centre of Productivity: Energy use and saving in office buildings, school buildings, commercial buildings, hospitals and hotels, Athens 1992

Greek

3 Energy study on 22 restaurants within the framework of the European programme “Energy efficient kitchens – leading the way to sustainable production” (4.1031/Z/101/2002)

Greek

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 M. Santamouris, C.A. Balaras, E. Daskalaki, A. Argiriou, A. Gaglia: Energy conservation and retrofitting

potential in Hellenic hotels, Journal Energy and Buildings, 1995

Page 147: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Greece

Page 36 February 2005

REVIEW SUMMARY GREECE

17 Gas and electricity are used for cooking purposes in restaurants in approximately the proportions 30% and 70% respectively.

Sector

Number of establishments

Number of buildings

Estimated average floor area (m2)

Estimated total floor area (m2)

Estimated number of buildings >1000 m2

Annual Heating (kWh/m2)

Annual Cooling (kWh/m2)

Annual Lighting (kWh/m2/)

Annual Cooking17 (kWh/m2)

Annual (other) electricity (kWh/m2)

Annual Total (kWh/m2)

Offices Not known

Not known 1951 Not known Not known 85 34 25 60 Not known

Higher education 324 700 Not known Not known 400

Schools 6500 16800 1105 7183755 6900 65 Incl. In other 17 26 Not known

Sport halls 463 463 1500 555000 370 322 0 Incl. in other 37 73

Swimming pools 29 29 2800 81200 29 1095 0 Incl. In other 58 450

Hospitals Not known Not known Not known 299 3 52 53 407

Clinics 530 1961

Not known Not known Not known 180 48 26 21 275

Restaurants Not known

Not known Not known Not known Not known

Not registered

Incl. in other Incl. in other 1952 415 Not known

Hotels 8900 22830 3268 29085200 600 198 11 24 40 273

Page 148: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

Appendix National Review - Ireland

Page 149: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Ireland

Page 1 April 2005

EPLabel Review of energy benchmarks for occupied non-domestic buildings in six sectors

The following framework is designed to provide a structure for each Partner, sub-contractor or associated organisation to report the current situation in their country. It starts with a general overview of the availability of information about the energy used by non-domestic buildings. There is then space to detail information available about each specific sector. 0. General 0.1

Summary of national organisations which are responsible for or produce energy efficiency information (including benchmark data) for the design or management of non-domestic buildings The Department of the Environment, Heritage & Local Government will take the lead for legislatively implementing the measures contained within the Directive, in partnership with the Department for Communications, Marine & Natural Resources. The two Departments are being supported by Sustainable Energy Ireland (SEI) in preparing a Draft Action Plan for implementation of the Directive in Ireland. Consultation with a wide range of interests in the property and construction sector will be part of this process. It is expected that the Draft Action Plan will be published for public comment by April 2005.

0.2

Summary of national plans for implementation of the EPBD Article 7.3 (energy certificate for public display in public buildings over 1000 m2) including which organisations are responsible for developing the implementation plans. Not information yet. SEI will inform the decisions.

0.3 Summary of national plans for implementation of the EPBD Article 10 (independent experts) including which organisations are involved. Not information yet. SEI will inform the decisions.

0.4

Summary of arrangements for your country to review and comment on the CEN standards relating to implementation of the EPBD, soon to be released for Public comment. An Energy Performance of Buildings Standards Group has been established by the National Standards Association of Ireland (NSAI) to review the proposed standards from an Irish perspective.

0.5 Prevalence of common ventilation systems in non-domestic buildings over 1,000 m²

Page 150: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Ireland

Page 2 April 2005

Category Names of common systems, comments and observations A Fully Air conditioned with humidification

Very rare in all sectors.

B Fully Air conditioned without humidification

Rare, only some libraries, office buildings with high loads and restaurants.

C Mechanical ventilation (no cooling)

Common in deep plan buildings, restaurants, sports. Usually for part of the building or specific use rooms.

D Natural ventilation

Most common in all 6 sectors

E Mixed mode (mixture of mechanical and natural ventilation ie C and D)

Common to mix mechanical an natural ventilation for different part of a building. Also temporal controlled mechanical ventilation as cooling strategy in daily / seasonal basis.

F Local cooling eg split system for small areas used with systems C, D or E

Restaurants.

G Top cooling (normally system C with cooling used to limit peak temperatures to say 25°C during hot weather only

Very rare

H Other (please specify)

0.6 Identify common occupancy times

Possible schedules for hours of use Comments A 10 hours/day Monday – Friday only B Extended hours Monday – Friday only eg 06.00 – 21.00 C Saturday morning eg 09.00 – 13.00 D 10 hours/day Saturday E 10 hours/day Saturday and Sunday F Extended hours Saturday and Sunday G 24/7 H Other 1 (please specify) Schools 9 to 14.30 primary, 9 to 15.30 secondary

Monday-Friday, special holiday periods… I Other 2 (please specify) 0.7 Information on current energy metering arrangements in your country

Building or parts of building to be assessed

Likely presence of dedicated main utility meters for all energy supplies to the building

Likely presence of sub-meters for fossil-fuel or heat supplies to the building or part of building

Likely presence of sub-meters for electricity supplies to the building or part of building

Individual whole building (not part of a site)

Common

Rare Very rare

Parts of a building (occupied by different owners or tenants)

Very rare Very rare Very rare

Building on a multi-building site (eg a university campus)

Common Rare Very rare

Other

Page 151: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Ireland

Page 3 April 2005

Sector 1: Public administration offices 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

Public administration offices comprises local authorities and central government buildings. There are

26 counties in the Republic Ireland, some of them with centralized offices, and other with offices dispersed in various buildings. Also City Council Offices in main cities. Central government buildings are mainly located in Dublin. Most of the public administration property is managed by the Office of Public Works (OPW) , which last year started a monitoring programme for some of the buildings. No information collected yet on number or type of buildings. No indication yet on how EPBD will be implemented.

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Town hall , City Hall

Big differences on size

County Council Offices

26 counties, but some of them not with centralised offices.

Central Government Offices

Different type and sizes of buildings

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office B open plan office C computer/server room D debating chamber E meeting room F Kitchen G Restaurant H Reception I Other 1 (please specify) J Other 2 (please specify) K Other 3 (please specify) L Other 4 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Conor Clarke Office of Public Works (OPW) Currently monitoring energy consumption of a big sample of Public Administration Models

B Paul Overy Overy & Associates Energy Consultant monitoring 10 public “model solutions” on behalf of SEI

C D

Page 152: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Ireland

Page 4 April 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating Other

Units (000 m²) Town hall /City Hall

- - - -

County Hall

- - - -

Central Government

- - - -

Total for sector

- - - -

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

NO DATA AVAILABLE

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation -

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy -

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other No benchmark data available. Benchmark figures commonly used derived from ECON guides and CIBSE guides.

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades Building Regulations, Technical Guidance Documents, Part L (2004, Conservation of fuel and energy for buildings other than dwellings). Consultation Document

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc Building Regulations, Technical Guidance Documents, Part F(2002, Ventilation) , Part J (1997 ,Heat producing appliances)

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies

Page 153: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Ireland

Page 5 April 2005

Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1 Limerick County Council Possible Monitoring Data 2 SEI Model Solutions Scheme

Monitoring Programme

Ongoing installation of monitoring equipment in 10 public administration buildings.

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

None in Ireland. Commonly used UK data.

5.2 Low energy design guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 154: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Ireland

Page 6 April 2005

Sector 2: Higher education (Universities, Colleges of Further Education, etc) 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

Ireland has 34 third level educational institutions., which accounts for around 130,000 students.

The institutions can be subdivided in Institutes of Technology, HEA Colleges and Others. Most of them comprise a wide variety of buildings and uses on a building site. No information is available yet on number of buildings, and no indication on how EPBD will be implemented.

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Institutes of Technology

HEA Colleges Others

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office B open plan office C computer/server room D lecture theatre E meeting room F kitchen G restaurant H reception I dry sports J swimming pool K research laboratory, workshop L residential (bedrooms, etc) M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

Page 155: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Ireland

Page 7 April 2005

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A John Dolan Department of Education and Science

Government Ministry

B Cian Oriordan Powertherm Solutions Responsible of an Energy Management Bureau for 30 university buildings in Dublin area

C Donal McGowan Manager of the Energy Unit, UCD D E F G H 2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total

floor area for the sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating Other

Units (000 m²) Universities

- - - -

HE Colleges

- - - -

Sub-sector 3

- - - -

Sub-sector 4

Total for sector

- - - -

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

No benchmark data available.

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc

Page 156: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Ireland

Page 8 April 2005

Categorise as national standard, research data or other No benchmarks available in Ireland.

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1

Urban Institute Ireland BMS data possibly available

2 E3 , Energy Management Bureau

Data of energy consumption on 30 university buildings available. No sub-metering

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

None available

5.2 Low energy design guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 157: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Ireland

Page 9 April 2005

Sector 3: Schools

1 Description of sector

1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

The ‘schools’ sector covers all educational establishments for children aged from 4 to 18.

There are around 3300 primary schools or so-called ‘National Schools’ in Ireland, which include a small number of special schools. The vast majority of national schools are State-aided parish schools. The primary schools range from 10 to 900 pupils, with an average of 135 pupils.

The second-level education sector comprises secondary, vocational, community and comprehensive schools. Secondary schools are privately owned and managed. The trustees of the majority of these schools are religious communities or Boards of Governors. There are around 740 secondary schools in the country, ranging from 20 to more than 2000 pupils, with an average of 450 pupils. A school may consist of a single building or a site encompassing many buildings and facilities.

No indication yet on how EPBD will be applied.

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

Primary schools Day schools for children aged 4 to 12 3300

Secondary Schools Day schools for children aged 12 to 18. 740

1.3 Description of types of spaces (excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets)

Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments to note exceptions

A Principal’s office

B Classrooms and other teaching space

C Computer/server room Increasingly.

D Staff room

E Library

F kitchen Snacks, reheat or hot meal preparation

G Canteen / Restaurant Secondary Schools only

H reception

I Dry sports / Hall / Multiple Use room

J swimming pool Secondary schools only , very rare

K laboratory, workshop Secondary schools only

L residential (bedrooms, etc) Secondary boarding schools

M Changing Rooms

N Resource rooms / special needs room

Page 158: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Ireland

Page 10 April 2005

1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector

Name of individual

(if known)

Organisation represented Role of organisation

A John Dolan Department of Education and Science

Government Ministry

B Paul Overy Overy and Associates, Energy consultants, undertaken simulation and energy auditing of schools

C Jim Coady Coady and Associates Architects, Specialists in school design

D - Eco Unesco Running sustainable programmes in schools

E - An Taisce Green schools programme

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector 2.1 Estimate of total energy use (BASED IN UK BENCHMARK FIGURES)

No schools

Ave no/ pupils

per school

Space per

pupil

Estimate of total

floor area for sector

Electricity Fossil fuel

District heating

Other

Units m² (000 m²) kWh/m²/yr kWh/m²/yr

kWh/m²/yr kWh/m²/yr

Primary schools 3,300 135 10 4455 32 164 0 0Secondary Schools 740 450 10 3330 33 144 0 0 TWh/year Total for sector 7785 0.25 1.2 2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data

-

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

-

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy -

2.5 Other comments

No energy data for schools available in Ireland.

Page 159: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Ireland

Page 11 April 2005

3. Energy benchmarks available

3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc

Categorise as national standard, research data or other

No energy benchmarks for schools available in Ireland

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

Building Regulations, Technical Guidance Documents, Part L (2004, Conservation of fuel and energy for buildings other than dwellings).Consultation Document

Technical Guidance Documents, Planning & Building Unit Building Section Department of Education and Science

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems

Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

Building Regulations, Technical Guidance Documents, Part F(2002, Ventilation) , Part J (1997 ,Heat producing appliances)

Technical Guidance Documents, Planning & Building Unit Building Section Department of Education and Science

3.5 Other

Benchmark study for Sustainable Energy Ireland being carried at the moment by ERG and BRE

4. Data from building case studies

Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study.

Name of study Data available Date

1 Good Practice case study : Gaelscoil An Eiscir Riada, Tullamore, Co.Offaly

Possibly BMS data available. 2003

5. Publications

5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

None in Ireland. Commonly used is the CIBSE Guide F 2004 Edition. The Section 20 of this guide contains all the known UK energy and component benchmarks available at the time of publication (December 2003).

5.2

Low energy design guides

Technical Guidance Documents, Planning & Building Unit Building Section Department of Education and Science

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references Sector 4: Sports centres 1 Description of sector

Page 160: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Ireland

Page 12 April 2005

1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

The number of sports buildings in Ireland is 505. The buildings include traditional and new local authority swimming pools (70 & 25 resp.), hotel leisure clubs (140), private fitness clubs (50), professionally operated community sports centres (100) and small health clubs (120).

No indication yet about how EPBD will be implemented

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Dry sports centre Hotel leisure clubs, private fitness clubs, sport centres

and health clubs.

Centre with swimming pool Swimming pool only Traditional and new local authority swimming pools

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office B open plan office C computer/server room D lecture theatre E meeting room F kitchen G restaurant H reception I indoor dry sports J swimming pool K changing facilities L outdoor sports M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A John Curtis Economic and Social Research Institute, ESRI

B ILAM (Institute of Leisure an Amenitiy Management)

C Department of Arts, Sport and Tourism

D Sports Council of Ireland E John Ryan Dublin City Council Responsible of local authority swimming

pools. F

Page 161: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Ireland

Page 13 April 2005

G H 2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total

floor area for the sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating Other

Units (000 m²) Dry sports centre

- - - -

Centre with swimming pool

- - - -

Swimming pool only

- - - -

Sub-sector 4

Total for sector

- - - -

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

No data available

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other No benchmarks available

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1 Finglas Swimming Pool Possibly BMS data available.

Page 162: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Ireland

Page 14 April 2005

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

No data available

5.2 Low energy design guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 163: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Ireland

Page 15 April 2005

Sector 5: Hospitals and other Health Facilities 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

The sector includes hospitals, clinics and health centres.

The Irish Health Board Executive is divided in nine Health Boards that are responsible of the delivery of services on their respective areas. No indication yet about how EPBD will be implemented

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Acute hospitals District/Community Hospitals Psychiatric Hospitals and Psychiatric residential units

Geriatric Hospitals, Homes and Community Care

Other 1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office B open plan office C computer/server room D lecture theatre E meeting room F kitchen G restaurant H reception I research laboratory J swimming pool K operating theatre L wards (overnight accommodation) M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Energy Manager/Technical Services Officer

Each of the 9 Irish Health Boards.

B C D E F

Page 164: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Ireland

Page 16 April 2005

G H 2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total

floor area for the sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating Other

Units (000 m²) Acute hospitals District/Community Hospitals

Psychiatric Hospitals and Psychiatric residential units

Geriatric Hospitals, Homes and Community Care

Total for sector

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

Not data available

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other No energy benchmarks available

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

Page 165: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Ireland

Page 17 April 2005

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1 Mater Private Hospital

Possibly BMS data available.

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

No benchmarks available in Ireland

5.2 Low energy design guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Sector 6: Hotels and Restaurants 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

In 2002 there were a total of 860 registered hotels and 488 guesthouses.

Page 166: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Ireland

Page 18 April 2005

The total floor space of hotels and restaurants was estimated at 4.6M m2 by Sustainable Energy Ireland. A number of 2115 restaurants in operation by 2002 have been recorded by Failte Ireland. No indication yet about how EPBD will be implemented

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Bed & breakfast / Guesthouse

Hotel Restaurant

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office B open plan office C computer/server room D residential (bedrooms, etc) E meeting room F kitchen G restaurant H reception I indoor dry sports J swimming pool K retail outlets L bar M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Failte Ireland B Irish Hotels Federation C Chains of supermarkets managers D E F G H 2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total

floor area for the sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating Other

Units (000 m²)

Page 167: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Ireland

Page 19 April 2005

Bed & breakfast / Guesthouse

- - - -

Hotel - - - - Restaurant - - - - Sub-sector 4

Total for sector

- - - -

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

No data available

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other No benchmark data available

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1

2

3

4

Page 168: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Ireland

Page 20 April 2005

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

Not benchmark data available.

5.2 Low energy design guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

APPENDIX 1. CONTACTS TO BE INCLUDED ON IAG FOR SOME OF ALL TYPES OF BUILDINGS.

Arup Consulting Engineers 10 Wellington Road Dublin 4 Contact: Finbar Murphy Tel: 614 4200 Email: [email protected]

Association of Energy Professionals of Ireland 8 Ballycurreen Commercial Park Kinsale Rd

Page 169: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Ireland

Page 21 April 2005

Cork Contact: Pat Stephens Tel: 021 432 0480 Email: [email protected]

Buro Happold Consultants Ltd. 54 Merrion Square Dublin 2 Tel: 639 3042 Contact: Edith Blennerhassett Email: [email protected] Construction Industry Federation Construction House Canal Road Dublin 6 Tel: 406 6023 or 086 822 5600 Contact: Aiden Burke Email: [email protected]

Dept. of the Environment and Local Government

Custom House

Dunlin 1

Tel: 888 2000 Contact: Patrick Minogue Email: [email protected] Irish Estates (Management ) Ltd. Beresford Court Beresford Place Dublin 1 Tel: 704 1400 Contact: Darragh Harte, Director of Shared Services Email: [email protected] Contact: David Jacobs Email: [email protected] Irish Property and Facilities Managers Association 5 Wilton Place Dublin 2 Tel: 676 5500 Contact: Jerome O’Connor

Page 170: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Ireland

Page 22 April 2005

Office of Public Works 51 St Stephens Green Dublin 2 Tel: 677 2815n Contact: Conor Clarke Email: [email protected] Royal Institute of Architects of Ireland 8 Merrion Square Dublin 2 Tel: 676 1703 Contact:Ann McNicholl/Adrian Joyce Email: [email protected] / [email protected] Roadstone Provinces Ltd. Saggart Co Dublin Tel: 404 1400 Contact: Owen Rowley Email: [email protected] Society of Chartered Surveyors Mulcahy McDonagh and Parners 46-48 Pembroke Road Ballsbridge Dublin 4. Tel: 668 9833 Contact: Trevor schwer Email: [email protected] Sustainable Energy Ireland (SEI) Glasnevin Dublin 9 Tel: 836 9080 Contacts: Ivan Sproule , Paula Rice, Kevin O’Rourke

Page 171: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

Appendix National Review - Netherlands

Page 172: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in The Netherlands

Page 1 February 2005

EPLabel Review of energy benchmarks for occupied non-domestic buildings in six sectors

The following framework is designed to provide a structure for each Partner, sub-contractor or associated organisation to report the current situation in their country. It starts with a general overview of the availability of information about the energy used by non-domestic buildings. There is then space to detail information available about each specific sector. 0. General 0.1

Summary of national organisations which are responsible for or produce energy efficiency information (including benchmark data) for the design or management of non-domestic buildings VROM (ministry of housing, planning and environment) SenterNovem (energy institute that assists the ministry) ISSO (knowledge center/ institute for HVAC sector)

0.2

Summary of national plans for implementation of the EPBD Article 7.3 (energy certificate for public display in public buildings over 1000 m2) including which organisations are responsible for developing the implementation plans. A transitional arrangement is being put in place to phase into the complete implementation of EPBD for all buildings in January 2007, at which time all buildings must have an energy certificate at the time of transaction. In accordance with the EPBD, this certificate must be clearly displayed in public buildings. The energy certificate for existing buildings will be based on the voluntary EPA-regulations, Energy Performance Advice, currently in place for existing buildings. The EPA advice includes an Energy Index, based on a technical inventory of the building, which will form the actual energy certification. The EPA must be performed by a certified professional. Any EPA performed before January 1st 2007 will be considered an energy certificate as required by the EPBD. For the energy performance of new buildings a requirement (EPC, Energy Performance Coefficient) is already in place. It is intended that the EPBD energy certificate for new buildings will be related to this EPC. It is unclear if an independent expert is required to attain this certificate. All EPBD measures are based on calculated energy use. Final responsibility for these regulations lies with VROM (see above), assisted by SenterNovem (see above).

0.3 Summary of national plans for implementation of the EPBD Article 10 (independent experts) including which organisations are involved. As far as has been communicated by VROM, the method for determining the qualification of an independent expert for energy certification will be similar to the method used for the EPA-regulations currently in place. This is based on assessment directives (BRL), which are still being adjusted for this purpose. The mandatory regular inspection of building-systems is partially in place, though a certified professional is not yet required. It is unclear how this will be adapted to the EPBD requirements. For the energy performance of new buildings a requirement (EPC, Energy Performance Coefficient) is already in place. It is intended that the EPBD energy certificate will be related to this EPC. If an independent expert is required to attain this certificate is unclear.

0.4

Summary of arrangements for your country to review and comment on the CEN standards relating to implementation of the EPBD, soon to be released for Public comment.

Page 173: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in The Netherlands

Page 2 February 2005

• The Dutch Standardisation Institute NEN has a ‘shadow committee EPBD’ (schaduwcommissie), compiled of experts from the building industry, which is charged with reviewing the CEN standards

• The public is free to offer comments regarding CEN standards, also the NEN is organising a symposium on the EPBD implementation in the Netherlands for interested parties on June 15th

0.5 Prevalence of common ventilation systems in non-domestic buildings over 1,000 m²

Category Names of common systems, comments and observations A Fully Air conditioned with humidification

B Fully Air conditioned without humidification

C Mechanical ventilation (no cooling)

Sports functions, hotels, older/ smaller education functions

D Natural ventilation

(parking)

E Mixed mode (mixture of mechanical and natural ventilation ie C and D)

Restaurants, Sports functions, hotels, older/ smaller education functions

F Local cooling eg split system for small areas used with systems C, D or E

Restaurants

G Top cooling (normally system C with cooling used to limit peak temperatures to say 25°C during hot weather only

Hospitals, office functions, education functions (larger ed. buildings)

H Other (please specify)

0.6 Identify common occupancy times

Possible schedules for hours of use Comments A 10 hours/day Monday – Friday only Schools, Public admin. offices B Extended hours Monday – Friday only eg 06.00 – 21.00 Higher education C Saturday morning eg 09.00 – 13.00 D 10 hours/day Saturday Sports centres E 10 hours/day Saturday and Sunday Sports centres F Extended hours Saturday and Sunday Higher education G 24/7 Hotels, hospitals H Other 1 12.00-24.00, 7 days a week Restaurants I Other 2 (please specify) 0.7 Information on current energy metering arrangements in your country

Building or parts of building to be assessed

Likely presence of dedicated main utility meters for all energy supplies to the building

Likely presence of sub-meters for fossil-fuel or heat supplies to the building or part of building

Likely presence of sub-meters for electricity supplies to the building or part of building

Individual whole building (not part of a site)

Usually

Parts of a building (occupied by different owners or tenants)

Possibly

Often

Often

Building on a multi-building site (eg a university campus)

Usually

Page 174: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in The Netherlands

Page 3 February 2005

Other

Page 175: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in The Netherlands

Page 4 February 2005

Sector 1: Public administration offices 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

A public building has been defined as a building in which public services are offered, no further details

are available. Article 7.3 is likely to be applicable to public administration offices, which provide services/ are open to the public.

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings over 1,000 m²

National government Buildings used by the national government 263 total (RGD, 2005) Provincial government Buildings used by the provincial government 12 Town hall Buildings used by the municipal government 600 Water Board Buildings used by the water board 27 (uvw.nl, 2005) Municipal Buildings used by the municipality 250 Justice Buildings used by the court system 304 (total) Social security office Buildings used by social insurance providers 101 (total) (uwv.nl, 2005) Defence Buildings used by defence Police Buildings used by the police 25 regional corps (2005) Fire Department Buildings used by fire departments 25 regional corps (2005) 1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office Usually B open plan office Occasionally C computer/server room Common D debating chamber Occasionally E meeting room Common F kitchen Common G restaurant Common H reception Common I Other 1 (please specify) J Other 2 (please specify) K Other 3 (please specify) L Other 4 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Rijksgebouwendienst building manager of national government buildings

B Senter Novem governmental agency focusing on the development of knowledge regarding energy, innovation, environment and climate

C Ministerie Economische Zaken Ministry of Economic Affairs D VNG union of Dutch municipalities E Interprovinciaal overleg IPO inter provincial forum F Unie van Waterschappen union of water boards G Ministerie van Defensie Ministry of Defense

Page 176: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in The Netherlands

Page 5 February 2005

H 2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use (per year)

(source: Plan v. aanpak LTGO bestaande U-bouw Deel 1: globale inventarisatie, 23 Sep. 1999) Estimate of total

floor area for the sector (1996)

Electricity

Fossil fuel gas

District heating

Total (Primary energy) (1996)

Units [m² * 106] [kWh* 106] [m3* 106] [TJ] National government 2.9 3722 Provincial government

0.4 513

Town hall 4.3 204,3 86 5518 Water Board 1.1 1412 Municipal 1.1 1412 Justice 1.2 1540 Social security office 1.5 1925 Defence 9.5 12192 Police 0.8 86,4 1027 Fire Department 0.5 641 2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

Floor area

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation Gross floor area (area for each floor measured from the perimeter of the outer wall)

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy Heating degree days most likely if any, though unknown if applied here and, if so, if applied correctly.

2.5 Other comments Some governmental organizations and municipalities have an older building stock. There are exceptions to the EPBD requirements for monuments or protected buildings, which may apply to some of these buildings.

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other There are no official benchmarks available. The information provided under section 2 is based on the study “Plan v. aanpak LTGO bestaande U-bouw Deel 1: globale inventarisatie, 23 Sep. 1999” and Novem’s “Cijfers en Tabellen”. Most energy-use data is finally traced back to and the Rijksgebouwendienst (building manager of national government buildings), the reliability of which is uncertain, and the national Central Statistics Bureau (Centraal Bureau voor de Statistiek), which provides reliable data. A large portion of the data available is dated (here: 1996, 1988, 1990 and 1995).

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades New buildings must comply with the Energy Performance Coefficient (EPC) requirement, which has been in place since 1996, and has become more stringent over the years. The (calculated) required energy performance is determined by a number of specific building characteristics, and therefore varies from building to building. Energy Performance is based on primary energy use and building-bound energy use only (heating, cooling, DHW, pumps, fans, fixed lighting). There is a different requirement based on the same methodology for several different building functions. Often different functions must

Page 177: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in The Netherlands

Page 6 February 2005

be combined to determine the energy performance of one building. Large scale refurbishments (refurbishment cost > 25% of building value) will have to comply with the same requirements under EPBD.

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc Usually top cooling with mechanical ventilation

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1 Renovatie van kantoorgebouwen

Novem Case studies of energy-saving municipal & commercial office renovations

June 2001

2 Duurzame Kantoorgebouwen, wat leren de voorbeeldprojecten ons?

Sample projects energy-saving & sustainable building 1999

3 Energy performance of office buildings

Best practice energy performance of new office buildings – 9 casestudies, incl. municipal

June 1999

4 Voorbeeldprojecten Nationaal Dubo Centrum - Hoogheemraadschap Leiden - Waterschap Vallei en Eem - Gemeentehuis Nieuwegein - Gemeentelijk archiefdienst

R’dam - Kantoor Rijkswaterstaat

Terneuzen - Kantoor GGD Rivierenland

Sample projects energy-saving & sustainable building 1998-2001

5 Inspiratiebron voor duurzame investeringen - Energieprestaties van kantoorgebouwen, Novem

Best practice energy performance of new office buildings – 9 casestudies, incl. municipal

Nov 2000

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

Dutch: Novem, Cijfers en tabellen, - http://www.novem.nl/default.asp?documentId=28079

5.2 Low energy design guides

Page 178: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in The Netherlands

Page 7 February 2005

Nationaal Pakket Duurzaam Bouwen Utiliteitsbouw Beleid en concepten, Nieuwbouw en Beheer, 2002

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

Energy Prestatie Advies guidelines (EPA regulations)

5.4 Other useful references

Page 179: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in The Netherlands

Page 8 February 2005

Sector 2: Higher education (Universities, Colleges of Further Education, etc) 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

A public building has been defined as a building in which public services are offered, no further details

are available. It is currently not known if article 7.3 will be applicable to higher education. 1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

(Source: Plan van aanpak LTGO U-bouw sector onderwijs, 8 maart, 2002) Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings over 1,000

m² (1999, CBS) Universities WO – Scientific Education 13 (organizations) HE Colleges HBO – Higher Education 65 (organizations) Vocational & Adult Ed. BE – Vocational & Adult Education 177 (organizations)

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office Usually B open plan office C computer/server room Y D lecture theatre Y E meeting room Y F kitchen Common G restaurant Common H reception Common I dry sports Usually J swimming pool Sometimes K research laboratory, workshop, cleanroom Common L residential (bedrooms, etc) Dutch higher education usually does not have

residential campuses M maintenance workshops Common 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Ministerie van Onderwijs, Cultuur en Wetenschap

Ministry of Education, Culture and Science

B A Dutch University C D E F G H 2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use (per year)

(Source: Plan van aanpak LTGO U-bouw sector onderwijs, 8 maart, 2002)

Page 180: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in The Netherlands

Page 9 February 2005

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector (1999)

Electricity (primary) (1998)

Fossil fuel (primary) Gas (1998)

District heating Total (primary) (1998)

Units [x 1000 m²] [TJ] [TJ] [TJ] Universities

4134 1380 2530 3910

HE Colleges

2023 442 806 1248

Vocational & Adult Ed.

6000 1224 2232 3456

Total for sector

12157 3046 5568 8614

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy

Heating degree days most likely if any, though unknown if applied here and, if so, if applied correctly.

2.5 Other comments Universities often have an older building stock, which causes higher energy consumption. Moreover, there are exceptions to the EPBD requirements for monuments or protected buildings, which may apply to some of these buildings.

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other There are no official benchmarks available. The information provided under section 2 is based on the study “Plan van aanpak LTGO U-bouw sector onderwijs, 8 maart, 2002”. Most energy-use data is finally traced back to the national Central Statistics Bureau (Centraal Bureau voor de Statistiek), which provides reliable data, though a large portion of the data available is somewhat dated (here: 1998/1999).

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades New buildings must comply with the Energy Performance Coefficient (EPC) requirement, which has been in place since 1996, and has become more stringent over the years. The (calculated) required energy performance is determined by a number of specific building characteristics, and therefore varies from building to building. Energy Performance is based on primary energy use and building-bound energy use only (heating, cooling, DHW, pumps, fans, fixed lighting). There is a different requirement based on the same methodology for several different building functions. Often different functions must be combined to determine the energy performance of one building. Large scale refurbishments (refurbishment cost > 25% of building value) will have to comply with the same requirements under EPBD.

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies

Page 181: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in The Netherlands

Page 10 February 2005

Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1 Plan van aanpak LTGO U-bouw,

sector onderwijs, PRC Bouwcentrum

Energy use & saving potential in educational sector March 2002

2 Voorbeeldprojecten Nationaal Dubo Centrum - Hogeschool Limburg, Heerlen - Van Hall Instituut, Leeuwarden

Sample projects energy-saving & sustainable building 1998-2001

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

Dutch: Novem, Cijfers en tabellen, - http://www.novem.nl/default.asp?documentId=28079 Dutch, 2002: PRC Bouwcentrum - Plan van aanpak LTGO U-bouw, sector onderwijs Dutch: Energieverbruik van gebouwgebonden energiefuncties in woningen en utiliteitsgebouwen, ECN 1999, ECN-C--99-084

5.2 Low energy design guides Nationaal Pakket Duurzaam Bouwen Utiliteitsbouw Beleid en concepten, Nieuwbouw en Beheer, 2002

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 182: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in The Netherlands

Page 11 February 2005

Sector 3: Schools 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

A public building has been defined as a building in which public services are offered, no further details

are available. It is currently not known if article 7.3 will be applicable to schools. 1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

(Source: Plan van aanpak LTGO U-bouw sector onderwijs, 8 maart, 2002) Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings over 1,000 m²

(1999, CBS) Primary schools Primary education 7238 (organizations) Secondary Schools General secondary education 666 (organizations)

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office Usually B open plan office C computer/server room Common D class room Y E meeting room Y F kitchen Common G restaurant Often combined with large gathering area H reception Common in secondary I dry sports Often centrally consolidated in primary education

Usually independent for secondary education J swimming pool Usually not K research laboratory, workshop Common in secondary L residential (bedrooms, etc) None M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A VNG Organisation of Dutch municipalities B Ministerie van Onderwijs, Cultuur

en Wetenschap Ministry of education, culture and science

C D E F G H 2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use (per year)

(Source: Plan van aanpak LTGO U-bouw sector onderwijs, 8 maart, 2002)

Page 183: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in The Netherlands

Page 12 February 2005

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector (1999)

Electricity (primary) (1998)

Fossil fuel (primary) Gas (1998)

District heating Total (primary) (1998)

Units [x 1000 m²] [TJ] [TJ] [TJ] Primary & secondary schools

9204 1158 4400.4 5558.4

Secondary Schools

7704 938 3564.4 4502.4

Sub-sector 3

Sub-sector 4

Total for sector

2096 7964.8 10060.8

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy Heating degree days most likely if any, though unknown if applied here and, if so, if applied correctly.

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other There are no official benchmarks available. The information provided under section 2 is based on the study “Plan van aanpak LTGO U-bouw sector onderwijs, 8 maart, 2002”. Most energy-use data is finally traced back to the national Central Statistics Bureau (Centraal Bureau voor de Statistiek), which provides reliable data, though a large portion of the data available is somewhat dated (here: 1998/1999).

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades New buildings must comply with the Energy Performance Coefficient (EPC) requirement, which has been in place since 1996, and has become more stringent over the years. The (calculated) required energy performance is determined by a number of specific building characteristics, and therefore varies from building to building. Energy Performance is based on primary energy use and building-bound energy use only (heating, cooling, DHW, pumps, fans, fixed lighting). There is a different requirement based on the same methodology for several different building functions. Often different functions must be combined to determine the energy performance of one building. Large scale refurbishments (refurbishment cost > 25% of building value) will have to comply with the same requirements under EPBD.

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

Page 184: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in The Netherlands

Page 13 February 2005

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1 Plan van aanpak LTGO U-bouw,

sector onderwijs, PRC Bouwcentrum

Energy use & saving potential in educational sector March 2002

2 Heating System Control – Nijmegen, The Netherlands, CADDET

Energy saving potential in primary & secondary schools

1995

3 Duurzame Schoolgebouwen – wat leren de voorbeelprojecten ons? Nationaal Dubocentrum

Sample projects energy-saving & sustainable building 1999

4 Voorbeeldprojecten Nationaal Dubo Centrum - Arnhem Scholencomplex

Rijkerswoerd - Peuterpalet, Leiden - Educatorium, Utrecht

Sample projects energy-saving & sustainable building 1998-2001

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

Dutch, 2004 (?): Novem, Cijfers en tabellen, - http://www.novem.nl/default.asp?documentId=28079 Dutch, 2002: PRC Bouwcentrum - Plan van aanpak LTGO U-bouw, sector onderwijs Dutch: Energieverbruik van gebouwgebonden energiefuncties in woningen en utiliteitsgebouwen, ECN 1999, ECN-C--99-084

5.2 Low energy design guides Dutch, Duurzame Schoolgebouwen, voorbeeldprojecten duurzaam en energiezuinig bouwen – SEV Novem, Nationaal Dubo Centrum Nationaal Pakket Duurzaam Bouwen Utiliteitsbouw Beleid en concepten, Nieuwbouw en Beheer, 2002

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 185: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in The Netherlands

Page 14 February 2005

Sector 4: Sports centres 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

A public building has been defined as a building in which public services are offered, no further details

are available. It is currently not known if article 7.3 will be applicable to public sports centres. 1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

(source: Plan v. aanpak LTGO bestaande U-bouw Deel 1: globale inventarisatie, 23 Sep. 1999) Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Dry sports centre Centre with swimming pool Centre with ice rink

13090 total #, area’s unknown (1996)

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office Limited office space B open plan office C computer/server room D lecture theatre E meeting room Sometimes F kitchen Sometimes G restaurant Sometimes H reception Sometimes I indoor dry sports Y J swimming pool Sometimes K changing facilities Y L outdoor sports Sometimes M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A GGD Nederland (Gemeentelijke Gezondheids Dienst

union of municipal agencies responsible for protection and advancement of public health

B Ministerie VWS Ministry of Public Health and Sport C VNG union of Dutch municipalities D E F G H 2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

Page 186: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in The Netherlands

Page 15 February 2005

2.1 Estimate of total energy use (Building-bound primary energy use (heating, cooling, DHW, pumps, fans, fixed lighting) per year) (Source: Energieverbruik van gebouwgebonden energiefuncties in woningen en utiliteitsgebouwen, ECN 1999, ECN-C--99-084)

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector

Electricity (1997)

Fossil fuel Gas (1997)

District heating Other

Units (000 m²) PJ PJ Dry sports centre

1,5 3,3

Centre with swimming pool

1,3 1,9

Centre with ice rink

Sub-sector 4

Total for sector

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

Primary electricity based on 40% efficiency

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy Heating degree days most likely if any, though unknown if applied here and, if so, if applied correctly.

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other There are no official benchmarks available. The information provided under section 2 is based on the study “Energieverbruik van gebouwgebonden energiefuncties in woningen en utiliteitsgebouwen, ECN 1999, ECN-C--99-084”. Most energy-use data is finally traced back to the national Central Statistics Bureau (Centraal Bureau voor de Statistiek), which provides reliable data, though a large portion of the data available is somewhat dated (here: 1997).

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades New buildings must comply with the Energy Performance Coefficient (EPC) requirement, which has been in place since 1996, and has become more stringent over the years. The (calculated) required energy performance is determined by a number of specific building characteristics, and therefore varies from building to building. Energy Performance is based on primary energy use and building-bound energy use only (heating, cooling, DHW, pumps, fans, fixed lighting). There is a different requirement based on the same methodology for several different building functions. Often different functions must be combined to determine the energy performance of one building. 3Large scale refurbishments (refurbishment cost > 25% of building value) will have to comply with the same requirements under EPBD.

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

Page 187: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in The Netherlands

Page 16 February 2005

Generally sport centres have mechanical ventilation with air-based heating and no mechanical cooling.

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1 Plan van aanpak LTGO

bestaande U-bouw, deel 1 globale inventarisatie

Number of buildings, floor area and energy use for electricity and gas per sector

1999

2 Voorbeeldprojecten Nationaal Dubo Centrum - Sportcentrum Nieuwland,

Amersfoort

Sample projects energy-saving & sustainable building 1998-2001

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

Dutch: Energieverbruik van gebouwgebonden energiefuncties in woningen en utiliteitsgebouwen, ECN 1999, ECN-C--99-084

5.2 Low energy design guides Nationaal Pakket Duurzaam Bouwen Utiliteitsbouw Beleid en concepten, Nieuwbouw en Beheer, 2002

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 188: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in The Netherlands

Page 17 February 2005

Sector 5: Hospitals and other Health Facilities 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

A public building has been defined as a building in which public services are offered, no further details

are available. It is currently not known if article 7.3 will be applicable to hospitals and clinics. 1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

(Source: www.brancherapporten.minvws.nl/object_document/o323n399.html, 2002 / http://www.rivm.nl/vtv/object_document/o2662n20519.html, 2000)

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Academic Hospitals

The Netherlands has 8 academic hospitals, which do scientific research, besides providing care, treatment and exams for patients.

8 Hospital organizations *)

General Hospitals The Netherlands has 89 general hospitals, which provide care, treatment and exams for patients.

89 Hospital organizations *)

Categoral Hospitals There are 10 categoral hospitals, which provide these services (same as general hospitals) for specific patient groups (such as asthma patients, cancer patients, etc.).

10 Hospital organizations *)

Total Hospitals *) Due to a consolidation trend, many hospital organizations cover several (regional) buildings – more detailed figures on number of buildings unavailable. Total number of hospital beds provided in the Netherlands is 49848. Gross area per bed is approx. 93 m2. The trend is towards less beds per hospital.

107 Hospital organizations *) (all hospitals are over 1000 m²)

Nursing Homes & Institutions for the Elderly

Long-term care mainly for the elderly. Though Institutions for the elderly generally deal with less complex care-needs, these institutions have developed to be so similar, that they are best considered as one category.

Total (all sizes) 1697, though through consolidation these fall under approx. 800 actual organizations

Doctors’ surgery - - 1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office Management, staff B open plan office Staff, administration C computer/server room D lecture theatre Education E meeting room Staff F kitchen Central kitchen (patients/ restaurant) G restaurant Personnel & visitor restaurant H reception Several (by care & examination/ treatment

department) I research laboratory Patient not present

Patient present (clinical chemistry, medical microbiology, clinical pathology)

J swimming pool K operating theatre

Page 189: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in The Netherlands

Page 18 February 2005

L wards (overnight accommodation) Care (general, special, child, nursery, day care)

M examination and treatment spaces consultations, organ examinations, imaging, nuclear medicine, outpatient, urgent treatment, surgery (operating theatre), delivery rooms, physiotherapy

N special functions spaces dialysis, revalidation day treatment, radiotherapy, central sterilization, pharmacy

O facilitating function spaces communal spaces (patients), misc. services (retail, hairdresser), overnight accommodation staff (availability shift), bed management, linen department, personnel locker rooms, central warehouse, concierge, technical services workshops, archives, central medical administration

P recreation space patients & staff 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A GGD Communal healthcare service B Ministerie VWS Governmental health department C Zorgverzekeraars Nederland Health insurance sector organization D Cees van Mil Ziekenhuis Deventer Deventer Hospital E College voor Zorgverzekeraars

(CVZ) Governmental Health Insurance Organization

F College Bouw Ziekenhuisvoorzieningen

Governmental organization responsible for consulting the government in application of legislation regarding hospital facilities

G Nederlandse Vereniging voor Technisch facilitair management in de Gezondheidszorg (NVTG)

Dutch organisation for technical facility management in healthcare

H 2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use - per year

(Source: Plan van Aanpak U-bouw, sector gezondheidszorg, maart 2002 / www.brancherapporten.minvws.nl/object_document/o323n399.html, 2002 / Novem, Cijfers en tabellen, - http://www.novem.nl/default.asp?documentId=28079)

Estimate of total floor area for the sector (1998/99)

Electricity

Fossil fuel gas

District heating Other

Units (000 m²) [MWh] [m3] Academic Hospitals 568848 m² 67,693 MWh 13.65 x 106 General Hospitals 5901794 m² 702,313 MWh 142 x 106 Categoral Hospitals 639953 m² 76,154 MWh 15.35 x 106 Total for sector

7110595 m² 846,160 MWh 171 x 106 (usually local co-generation)

Nursing Homes & Institutions for the Elderly

Nursing Homes: 112441 places, 3051247 m² Elderly: 57632 beds

Page 190: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in The Netherlands

Page 19 February 2005

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

Floor Area

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation Gross floor area

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy Heating degree days most likely if any, though unknown if applied here and, if so, if applied correctly.

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other There are no official benchmarks available. The information provided under section 2 is based on the study “Novem, Cijfers en tabellen, - http://www.novem.nl/default.asp?documentId=28079”. The listed energy-use data is finally traced back to the Dutch organisation for technical facility management in healthcare (Nederlandse Vereniging voor Technisch facilitair management in de Gezondheidszorg), the data available is dated (here: 1990).

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades New buildings must comply with the Energy Performance Coefficient (EPC) requirement, which has been in place since 1996, and has become more stringent over the years. The (calculated) required energy performance is determined by a number of specific building characteristics, and therefore varies from building to building. Energy Performance is based on primary energy use and building-bound energy use only (heating, cooling, DHW, pumps, fans, fixed lighting). There is a different requirement based on the same methodology for several different building functions. Often different functions must be combined to determine the energy performance of one building. Large scale refurbishments (refurbishment cost > 25% of building value) will have to comply with the same requirements under EPBD.

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc Health care functions generally have full climate systems, including humidity control.

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1 EC Hospitals project (NNE-2001-

00295), in the Netherlands: Deventer Hospital

Building of new energy efficient hospital. Old energy use data available & new calculated energy use data available as well as energy-saving methods (innovative energy efficient designs) used. Other Hospital demonstration projects are in Denmark, Germany, Italy & Poland

2002-2005

Page 191: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in The Netherlands

Page 20 February 2005

2 Saving energy with Energy Efficiency in Hospitals, CADDET

Energy consumption in hospitals in several countries, as well as an overview of energy savings with regard to heating, lighting, DHW, energy management, building envelope and maintenance in demonstration projects. Case studies in Norway, Sweden, UK, Switzerland, Canada, USA, Australia & New Zealand http://www.caddet.org/public/uploads/pdfs/Report/ar_20.pdf

June 1996

3 4

5

6

7

8

9

10 5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

Dutch, October 2004: Ziekenhuiszorg: Aanbod en Capaciteit, feiten en cijfers – Maas J. (Nivel),

Ministerie Volksgezondheid, Welzijn en Sport -www.brancherapporten.minvws.nl/object_document/o323n339.html

Dutch: Novem, Cijfers en tabellen, - http://www.novem.nl/default.asp?documentId=28079 Dutch: Energieverbruik van gebouwgebonden energiefuncties in woningen en utiliteitsgebouwen, ECN

1999, ECN-C--99-084 5.2 Low energy design guides

Dutch, 2005: Ziekenhuizen onderzoeken mogelijkheid efficiënte energievoorziening - SenterNovem Nationaal Pakket Duurzaam Bouwen Utiliteitsbouw Beleid en concepten, Nieuwbouw en Beheer, 2002

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references Dutch, Nov. 2002: Algemeen Ziekenhuis, Bouwmaatstaven voor nieuwbouw – College Bouw

Ziekenhuisvoorzieningen (goedgekeurd: ministerie VWS) www.bouwcollege.nl

Page 192: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in The Netherlands

Page 21 February 2005

Sector 6: Hotels and Restaurants 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

A public building has been defined as a building in which public services are offered, no further details

are available. It is currently not known if article 7.3 will be applicable to hotels and restaurants. 1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

(source: Plan v. aanpak LTGO bestaande U-bouw Deel 1: globale inventarisatie, 23 Sep. 1999) Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Bed & breakfast Business hotel 2700 total Luxury hotel Restaurants??

19900 total

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office Usually B open plan office C computer/server room D residential (bedrooms, etc) Y E meeting room Y F kitchen Y G restaurant Y H reception Y I indoor dry sports Sometimes J swimming pool Sometimes K retail outlets L bar Y M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Horeca Nederland trade organisation for the hotel and catering industry

B C D E F G H 2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

(source: Plan v. aanpak LTGO bestaande U-bouw Deel 1: globale inventarisatie, 23 Sep. 1999) Estimate of total Electricity Fossil fuel District heating Other

Page 193: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in The Netherlands

Page 22 February 2005

floor area for the sector

Units (000 m²) [kWh] [m3] Bed & breakfast

Business hotel

337.5 x 106 97.6 x 106

Luxury hotel

Restaurants

819.6 x 106 237.1 x 106

Total for sector

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy Heating degree days most likely if any, though unknown if applied here and, if so, if applied correctly.

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other There are no official benchmarks available. The information provided under section 2 is based on the study “Plan v. aanpak LTGO bestaande U-bouw Deel 1: globale inventarisatie, 23 Sep. 1999”. Energy-use data is finally traced back to the national Central Statistics Bureau (Centraal Bureau voor de Statistiek), which provides reliable data, though a large portion of the data available is somewhat dated (here: 1994).

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades New buildings must comply with the Energy Performance Coefficient (EPC) requirement, which has been in place since 1996, and has become more stringent over the years. The (calculated) required energy performance is determined by a number of specific building characteristics, and therefore varies from building to building. Energy Performance is based on primary energy use and building-bound energy use only (heating, cooling, DHW, pumps, fans, fixed lighting). There is a different requirement based on the same methodology for several different building functions. Often different functions must be combined to determine the energy performance of one building. Large scale refurbishments (refurbishment cost > 25% of building value) will have to comply with the same requirements under EPBD.

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc Generally restaurants have mechanical ventilation, central heating with radiators and a compact cooling unit or central air cooling system. Hotels generally have mechanical ventilation and central heating.

Page 194: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in The Netherlands

Page 23 February 2005

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1 Plan van aanpak LTGO

bestaande U-bouw, deel 1 globale inventariseratie

Number of buildings, floor area and energy use for electricity and gas per sector

1999

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

Dutch: Energieverbruik van gebouwgebonden energiefuncties in woningen en utiliteitsgebouwen, ECN 1999, ECN-C--99-084

5.2 Low energy design guides Nationaal Pakket Duurzaam Bouwen Utiliteitsbouw Beleid en concepten, Nieuwbouw en Beheer, 2002

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 195: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

Appendix National Review - Norway

Page 196: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Norway

Page 1 February 2005

EPLabel Review of energy benchmarks for occupied non-domestic buildings in six sectors

The following framework is designed to provide a structure for each Partner, sub-contractor or associated organisation to report the current situation in their country. It starts with a general overview of the availability of information about the energy used by non-domestic buildings. There is then space to detail information available about each specific sector. 0. General 0.1

Summary of national organisations which are responsible for or produce energy efficiency information (including benchmark data) for the design or management of non-domestic buildings The energy statistics in general is quite poor. At the moment the national register of building, administrated by SSB (Statistics Norway) and operated by the municipalities is not useful for benchmarking. It is in general not reliable and the figures are based of number of buildings and not m2 etc. Enova SF (governmental agency) is holding a database of approx. 1500 buildings undergoing EE measures. This database is "growing" every year by 150-300 buildings and represents well-assured data. But its limited size and special selection (organisations interested in EE measures) makes it at bit special.

0.2

Summary of national plans for implementation of the EPBD Article 7.3 (energy certificate for public display in public buildings over 1000 m2) including which organisations are responsible for developing the implementation plans. There is a split in the implementation of the new directives. While NVE (Norwegian water- and energy administration) is responsible for labelling and inspections, BE (National office of Building technology and administration) will implement the new building Standards. The progress is in general: Draft regulations is by April 05 sent to the two Ministries (Oil and Energy + Municipalities) It is expected that the Reading will start in April/May Development of Guidelines and technical aspects will be made/ready during the fall 05 Implementation 1. Quarter 2006 So far there is no general understanding of how "public" will bee understood.

0.3 Summary of national plans for implementation of the EPBD Article 10 (independent experts) including which organisations are involved. Not yet determined. NVE is the main responsible for the implementation; the structure and its practical organisational aspects are subject to internal (working group) debate within NVE and their ministry. Norconsult guess there will be a separate system for education/ and nominees of QA of experts.

0.4

Summary of arrangements for your country to review and comment on the CEN standards relating to implementation of the EPBD, soon to be released for Public comment. All CEN standards are take care of by "Standard Norge". Comments are given by the "public" as well as from national experts.

0.5 Prevalence of common ventilation systems in non-domestic buildings over 1,000 m²

Page 197: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Norway

Page 2 February 2005

Category Names of common systems, comments and observations A Fully Air conditioned with humidification

Humidification is not any longer in focus

B Fully Air conditioned without humidification

Increasing numbers of installations. AC (including cooling in summer period) is in focus both for old installations (add on) and new installations.

C Mechanical ventilation (no cooling)

If talking of BALANCE ventilation, the most common system. If talking of "forced" evacuation (not balanced), rarely within the commercial/public sector (common in dwellings)

D Natural ventilation

Rarely, but in some areas (with good wind conditions) balanced systems are tested in several buildings.

E Mixed mode (mixture of mechanical and natural ventilation ie C and D)

Rarely

F Local cooling eg split system for small areas used with systems C, D or E

Quite common

G Top cooling (normally system C with cooling used to limit peak temperatures to say 25°C during hot weather only

Not in combination with C (but B)

H Other (please specify)

The ventilation standard in Norway is quite "high" for existing buildings compared to average (countries)

0.6 Identify common occupancy times

Possible schedules for hours of use Comments A 10 hours/day Monday – Friday only B Extended hours Monday – Friday only eg 06.00 – 21.00 C Saturday morning eg 09.00 – 13.00 D 10 hours/day Saturday E 10 hours/day Saturday and Sunday F Extended hours Saturday and Sunday G 24/7 Hospitals H Other 1 (please specify) Offices/schools normally 55 h/week Dependent on function/ winter/summer/city/culture/etc Hotel & restaurants I Other 2 (please specify) Universities normally 65 h/week 0.7 Information on current energy metering arrangements in your country

Building or parts of building to be assessed

Likely presence of dedicated main utility meters for all energy supplies to the building

Likely presence of sub-meters for fossil-fuel or heat supplies to the building or part of building

Likely presence of sub-meters for electricity supplies to the building or part of building

Individual whole building (not part of a site)

Yes. Metering of oil is often missing

Rarely Rarely

Parts of a building (occupied by different owners or tenants)

Quite common Very seldom Quite common if not fiscal/utility metering exists

Building on a multi-building site (eg a university campus)

Yes Rarely Rarely

Other

Page 198: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Norway

Page 3 February 2005

General remarks (Norway) The statistics of Norway is not in line with EPLABEL structure. In general it is not available figures for m2 for buildings. There are no figures excluding buildings smaller than 1000 m2 (This is only available for new buildings for the two last years). The basis for the Norwegian report is based on statistics from: * Statistics Norway (SSB) * Enova SF (2003) (*Supplemented by figures STATSBYGG/ENØK 2003) SSB document only numbers of buildings Enova make statistics for approximately 1500 buildings undertaken energy efficiency measures/activities. BTA = area according to NS3940 includes gross floor area (incl outer walls) with temperature above 15 degrees Celcius all year around. The Degree-day (GD) method is based of data from Norwegian Meteorological Institute (Factor 0,x ; x0 % of the consumption subject to be adjusted to outdoor temperature) Almost 98 % of all electricity produced within Norway is based on Hydro power. (CO2 emission=0) In 2004 less than 8 % was based in import (Denmark/Sweden). 1.1 There is at the moment indeed not clear any "understanding" of how the word "public" will be understood in Norway. NVE holds it open, in a restricted definition it covers only public owned buildings, and building where public bodies are located for a longer period (5 years or more). Total 42.000.000 m2. This report cover 3+3+12+3=21.000.000m2 The remaining 21'' is public administration and other public sectors (prisons, culture, transport (air, road ,rail), museums etc. (To fulfil the intention of the directive, all public accessible buildings should be covered NVE says, but concludes that this after all will be political decision.) 2.: Floor area 2.3: Gross area: BTA = area according to NS3940 includes gross floor area (incl outer walls) with temperature above 15 degrees Celcius all year around. 2.4 Degree-day (GD) published by the Norwegian Meteorological Institute The DG factor is defining how many percentages of the total energy consumption (measured) being subject to be adjusted according to the GD changes. Example: Hotels have a factor 0,2. This means that only 20 % of the total consumption is corrected to the change of DG. (If the DG is 5 %(up), this gives a change of the total equal to 1 %(up).) 3.1 So far NS 3032 is the basis for "typical values". This is a quite old NS, from the mid 80'. The building codes up to now called "energy frames" establish an alternative to given norms for insulation etc. defining maximum energy transmission in the construction. This system is no under revision, an approved model will be launched May 05. 3.2: New standards will be launched this spring (05). 3.4 (3.3 and ) no Comments 4: The in depth study Modellbyggprosjektet ("Model building project") goes into details in consumptions areas for selected building codes. For the EPlabel-project the codes for High education and Offices are relevant. The project identify consumption for 1) heating 2) ventilation 3) hot tap water 4) fans&pumps 5) lighting 6) unspecified 7) cooling (AC).

Page 199: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Norway

Page 4 February 2005

Sector 1: Public administration offices 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

Not yet determined in details.

It is expected that all public buildings will be covered by the 7.3 including rented facilities. In the Statistics, this sector is considered quite equal to offices in general and are included in this group/sector

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Administration (Town hall)

Total (Town Hall) (Include less than 1000m2)

400

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office x B open plan office C computer/server room x D debating chamber x E meeting room x F kitchen x G restaurant H reception x I Other 1 (please specify) x Archive/magazine/storage J Other 2 (please specify) x Library (public) K Other 3 (please specify) x L Other 4 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A B C D E F G H

Page 200: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Norway

Page 5 February 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating Other

Units Town hall

Social security office

Sub-sector 3

Sub-sector 4

Total for sector

Estimate: 400*7458= 2.983.200 m2 Office: 232,8 kWh/m2

83,4 % 7,1 % 9,4 %

0,1 %

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy Degree-day (GD) Norwegian Meteorological Institute Factor 0,4 ; 40 % of the consumption subject to be adjusted to outdoor temperature

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies

Page 201: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Norway

Page 6 February 2005

Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

5.2 Low energy design guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 202: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Norway

Page 7 February 2005

Sector 2: Higher education (Universities, Colleges of Further Education, etc) 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

This sector is in the Norwegian statistics together with schools and cultural buildings. It is therefore difficult to estimate only the higher educational institutions. The energy statistics for Higher education is based on 26 units.

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Universities HE Colleges Total (Include less than 1000m2)

624

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office x B open plan office C computer/server room x D lecture theatre x E meeting room x F kitchen x G restaurant (x) H reception x I dry sports J swimming pool K research laboratory, workshop x L residential (bedrooms, etc) NO M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A B C D E F G H

Page 203: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Norway

Page 8 February 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating Other

Units (000 m²) Universities

HE Colleges

Sub-sector 3

Sub-sector 4

Total for sector

(210.000 stud ents*15m2/pu) 3.000.000 m2 235 kWh/m2

76,8 % 10,2 % 13,0 %

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy Degree-day (GD) Norwegian Meteorological Institute Factor 0,6 ; 60 % of the consumption subject to be adjusted to outdoor temperature

2.5 Other comments The m2 are probably higher: qualified guess 2.500.000 m2

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies

Page 204: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Norway

Page 9 February 2005

Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

5.2 Low energy design guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 205: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Norway

Page 10 February 2005

Sector 3: Schools 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Primary schools Secondary Schools Total (include less than 1000m2)

5.339

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office x but limited numbers B open plan office C computer/server room D lecture theatre x rarely E meeting room F kitchen G restaurant NO H reception I dry sports x J swimming pool x rarely K research laboratory, workshop L residential (bedrooms, etc) No M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A B C D E F G H

Page 206: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Norway

Page 11 February 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating Other

Units Primary schools

190,8 kWh/m2

Secondary Schools

172,8 kWh/m2

Sub-sector 3

Sub-sector 4

Total for sector

3575*3339 11.936.925 m2 194,1 kWh/m2

86 % 11,5 % 2,2 % 0,3 %

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy Degree-day (GD) Norwegian Meteorological Institute Factor 0,6 ; 60 % of the consumption subject to be adjusted to outdoor temperature

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies

Page 207: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Norway

Page 12 February 2005

Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

5.2 Low energy design guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 208: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Norway

Page 13 February 2005

Sector 4: Sports centres 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Dry sports centre Centre with swimming pool Centre with ice rink Total (include less than 1000m2)

1116

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office B open plan office C computer/server room D lecture theatre E meeting room F kitchen G restaurant H reception I indoor dry sports x J swimming pool x (not so common) K changing facilities x L outdoor sports x M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A B C D E F G H

Page 209: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Norway

Page 14 February 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating Other

Units Dry sports centre

Centre with swimming pool

Centre with ice rink

Sub-sector 4

Total for sector

1116*2781= 3.100.000 m2 279 kWh/m2

85,1 % 10,5 % 4,3 % 0,1 %

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy Degree-day (GD) Norwegian Meteorological Institute Factor 0,6 ; 60 % of the consumption subject to be adjusted to outdoor temperature

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies

Page 210: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Norway

Page 15 February 2005

Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

5.2 Low energy design guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 211: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Norway

Page 16 February 2005

Sector 5: Hospitals and other Health Facilities 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² General hospital Day care centre Doctors’ surgery Total (include less than 1000m2)

100, an estimate. 73 defined in Enova statistics. 100

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office x B open plan office NO C computer/server room x D lecture theatre x E meeting room x F kitchen x G restaurant x H reception x I research laboratory x J swimming pool rarely K operating theatre x L wards (overnight accommodation) x M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A B C D E F G H

Page 212: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Norway

Page 17 February 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating Other

Units General hospital

Day care centre

Doctors’ surgery

Sub-sector 4

Total for sector

2 300 000 m2 389 kWh/m2

64,2 % 21,4 % 11,7 % 2,6 %

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy Degree-day (GD) Norwegian Meteorological Institute Factor 0,4 ; 40 % of the consumption subject to be adjusted to outdoor temperature

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies

Page 213: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Norway

Page 18 February 2005

Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

5.2 Low energy design guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 214: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Norway

Page 19 February 2005

Sector 6: Hotels and Restaurants 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Bed & breakfast Business hotel Luxury hotel Total (include less than 1000m2)

29116

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office x limited numbers B open plan office C computer/server room D residential (bedrooms, etc) x E meeting room x F kitchen x G restaurant x H reception x I indoor dry sports x J swimming pool x (less than 50 %) K retail outlets L bar x M SPA and Sauna x M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A B C D E F G H

Page 215: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Norway

Page 20 February 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating Other

Units (000 m²) Bed & breakfast

Business hotel

Luxury hotel

Sub-sector 4

Total for sector

1 797 164 MWh/295 kWh/m2 6.092.000 m2 295 kWh/m2

86 % 8 % 6 %

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

m2

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy Degree-day (GD) Norwegian Meteorological Institute Factor 0,2 ; 20 % of the consumption subject to be adjusted to outdoor temperature

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies

Page 216: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Norway

Page 21 February 2005

Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

5.2 Low energy design guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 217: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

Appendix National Review - Sweden

Page 218: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 1 February 2005

EPLabel Review of energy benchmarks for occupied non-domestic buildings in six sectors

The following framework is designed to provide a structure for each Partner, sub-contractor or associated organisation to report the current situation in their country. It starts with a general overview of the availability of information about the energy used by non-domestic buildings. There is then space to detail information available about each specific sector. 0. General 0.1

Summary of national organisations which are responsible for or produce energy efficiency information (including benchmark data) for the design or management of non-domestic buildings Responsible for housing, building and planning in Sweden is Boverket (The National Board of Housing, Building and Planning), who writes the Building Code for new buildings. Generally Boverket does not do much with existing buildings, except the OVK (Obligatory Ventilation Control), but they are proposed to be managing the future energy certifications through a new body. Generally responsible for all energy issues is STEM – Energimyndigheten (Swedish Energy Agency). They support Energy Advisers in all municipalities, who’s main audience is owners of one-family houses. Since 1 January 2005 STEM is responsible for all energy research, the former Council of Building Research does not support energy research any more. STEM also has a rather large programme for technical procurement with energy implications. The only officially available source is the Energy Statistics for Non-Residential Buildings from Statistics Sweden (SCB). They are produced annually based on a selection of about 8.000 lots of land with premises buildings (out of about 55.000 lots of land with premises buildings in Sweden). To this is added premises areas in residential buildings. Currently a special study is ongoing to investigate which statistical sources we have in Sweden to produce benchmarks already now. Unfortunately, I am rather pessimistic, particularly since we propose operational rating where we need tenants’ electricity, which currently no landlord has access to. The problem with the Energy Statistics is that they are Heating Statistics, only for buildings with some form of electric heating operational electricity is given (controlled by the building owner, no tenant electricity!). There is another statistics source available, the voluntary cooperation between Associations of municipalities and counties and other owners of public buildings. This database is available on internet, however all data are on municipality and county level, the database is divided into 8 building categories. The database is complete for most years for the 21 counties, but only about 30 municipalities have given data and of these only about 20 have given energy data. No official general or national benchmarks exist for any type of existing buildings and benchmarks for new buildings are currently reviewed based on the proposed new Building Code, which will come in force on 1 February 2006. A draft is currently out on review until May 9 and I expect rather large changes from the proposed benchmarks and calculation method in the final version, which will be ready during the autumn. The proposed way of calculating the energy is not proper for non-residential buildings, mainly because Boverket knows very little about non-residential buildings and the concept of calculating the integrated energy performance of buildings is totally new in Sweden.

0.2

Summary of national plans for implementation of the EPBD Article 7.3 (energy certificate for public display in public buildings over 1000 m2) including which organisations are responsible for developing the implementation plans. There was a report from STEM and Boverket regarding the implementation of EPBD in March 2003 (CIT Energy Management did a report to STEM about a year earlier), and on 6 November 2003 the Government launched an ”official investigation”. It presented a report 1 November 2004 to the then new Ministry of Sustainable Development (in practice the Ministry started working 1 January 2005), mainly concentration on the changes in the laws that are required. The investigation got a prolonged mandate and will deliver a new report to the Government on June 15, 2005. The plans in January were

Page 219: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 2 February 2005

that the Government would present the new law changes to the Parliament in June 2005. The Parliament closes for summer on June 18 and opens September 13. The new laws are planned to be in force by 1 January 2006. CIT Energy Management has lead a group, under the mandate of the ongoing official investigation, for developing more in detail how energy certification of non-residential buildings should be done in Sweden. We propose operational rating for existing non-residential buildings. The method is very much based on that it should be a part of the normal facility management process and that it must be useful for the building owner. For large building owners, with their papers in order, their most energy efficient buildings will have a possibility to use a “light audit” which will take 1-2 days. All other buildings will do more thorough audits, taking possibly 5 – 10 days. Building owners with “certified” energy management systems are proposed to have the possibility to do the energy certification inside their own facility management organisation (just as OVK is done in a ongoing pilot project), even use their own certified energy expert, provided that his is independent enough. In order to get statistics for benchmarks for public buildings all owners of such buildings must report energy use and floor area (together with some data about carried out, and planned, energy conservation measures) during 1 January 2006 to 30 September 2008. In the last quarter of 2008 provisional simplified energy certificates are issued centrally, which are fulfilling all the requirements in EPBD except that an independent expert do not issue them. Depending on in which statistical quartile, the buildings energy performance is placed; the certificate will be valid until 2010, 2013, 2015 or 2017. This means that the 25% “worst” public buildings must do an ordinary energy certification before 31 December 2010 , whereas the 25% best buildings can wait until 31 December 2017. These methods are just proposed, nothing is yet clear how the final wording will be in the report from “official investigation” in mid-June. Most of May will be a time for more discussions with reference groups etc. The definition of public buildings in Sweden is proposed to be based on the way the building is classified in the property tax register. Buildings with “a purpose that is useful for the society” is classified as “special buildings” regardless of the owner. “Special buildings” don’t have to pay property tax. This means that of the six sectors inside EPLabel, Hotels and restaurants are not classified as public buildings in Sweden. Sweden may change the lower limit for public buildings to 500 m² but nothing is decided yet.

0.3 Summary of national plans for implementation of the EPBD Article 10 (independent experts) including which organisations are involved. This is still very unclear. The original investigation proposed that the companies carrying out audits should be authorised and their employed experts personally certified. For the moment it is uncertain if the company will have to be authorised since this is impose a rather high annual cost, not so much for the authorisation process, bur for all the extra work inside the company. In CIT Energy Management’s new report there is a long chapter about the qualifications of the independent experts. There is also a chapter with checklists for building service systems and building shell including some connected energy conservation measures. There are currently no plans for the training of the 700-1,000 experts needed in Sweden during steady state conditions. The training must take place during 2006-2008. Responsible for the training will probably be Boverket, or rather a special Body connected to Boverket. So far only the persons for the Board of the Body (with no good name yet) has been named.

0.4

Summary of arrangements for your country to review and comment on the CEN standards relating to implementation of the EPBD, soon to be released for Public comment. The prEN standards are reviewed as all CEN standards in Sweden by different committees coordinated by SIS (Standardisation Committee in Sweden). However, since participation in the different committees is voluntary each standard may be treated very differently. Typically only large industrial companies are involved in the committees. There is no special work going on for these standards. Standards do not have a strong influence on the Swedish building process as in e.g. Germany. There is never a reference to a standard in the part of text of the Building Code, which is compulsory.

Page 220: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 3 February 2005

Standards are used voluntary and in the common (and totally dominating) way to write building specifications in Sweden, the AMA-system, there is a lot a references to relevant, mainly product, standards. More theoretical standards, such as the current CEN-standards, are not much used in Sweden, e.g. the EN ISO 13790:2004 standard about calculation of energy use for space heating (in residential buildings), and its predecessors, has never been used in Sweden In CIT Energy Management’s study the CEN standards are used as far as the general ideas are in accordance with the Swedish “way of working”.

0.5 Prevalence of common ventilation systems in non-domestic buildings over 1,000 m²

Category Names of common systems, comments and observations A Fully Air conditioned with humidification

Very uncommon, only in buildings with special require-ments on RH, e.g. operation theatres in hospitals (5), laboratories (2 & 5) and museums

B Fully Air conditioned without humidification

Common in all non-residential buildings after mid 1980s, increasingly common in retrofits of offices, etc. Always open-able windows

B1 Air-water systems Common in non-residential buildings from late 1960s to early 1980s. Ventilation with high air flow rates and AHU:s with air-to-air heat recovery, typically CAV-systems. Cooling by air; Heating by hydronic radiators

B2 “All-water systems” Common in non-residential buildings from the 1980s onward. Ventilation with hygienic air flow rates and AHU:s with air-to–air heat recovery, typically CAV-systems. Cooling hydronic systems, typically passive or active (induction units) chilled beams; Heating by hydronic radiators. Induction units below the windows or fan-coil units are a 1980s solution, nowadays chilled beams dominate totally.

C Mechanical ventilation (no cooling)

Common in non-residential buildings from 1950 to mid 1980s. Always open-able windows

D Natural ventilation

Common in schools pre 1960

E Mixed mode (mixture of mechanical and natural ventilation ie C and D)

Uncommon, if you don’t identify open-able windows in category B as mixed mode

F Local cooling eg split system for small areas used with systems C, D or E

Very uncommon, although may exist in older buildings with C & D

G Top cooling (normally system C with cooling used to limit peak temperatures to say 25°C during hot weather only

This is the normal way Swedish category B buildings are designed, but perhaps not always operated

H Other (please specify)

Page 221: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 4 February 2005

0.6 Identify common occupancy times

Possible schedules for hours of use Comments A 10 hours/day Monday – Friday only Typical in sectors 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (health care

centres) and 6 (restaurants with lunch meals)

B Extended hours Monday – Friday only e.g. 06.00 – 21.00

Common in sectors 2+3 (evenings), 4 (evenings), 6 (restaurants with lunch and/or evening meals)

C Saturday morning e.g. 09.00 – 13.00 Sector 6 (restaurants with lunch meals) D 10 hours/day Saturday Sectors 4 & 6 (restaurants with lunch meals)E 10 hours/day Saturday and Sunday Sectors 4 & 6 (restaurants with lunch meals) F Extended hours Saturday and Sunday Sectors 4 & 6 (restaurants with lunch and

evening meals) G 24/7 Sector 5 (hospitals) & 6 (hotels) H Other 1 (please specify) I Other 2 (please specify) 0.7 Information on current energy metering arrangements in your country

Building or parts of building to be assessed

Likely presence of dedicated main utility meters for all energy supplies to the building

Likely presence of sub-meters for fossil-fuel or heat supplies to the building or part of building

Likely presence of sub-meters for electricity supplies to the building or part of building

Individual whole building (not part of a site)

Heating always. Electricity sometimes for the whole building.

Unusual. Sometimes for service hot water. Typically no sub-meter per tenant. Restaurants may have their own gas contract (pipe of flasks)

In multi-tenant buildings: each tenant and the landlord have their own contracts with the utility

Parts of a building (occupied by different owners or tenants) Is this a building?

Typically whole building. Unusual. Each tenant typically has his own contract with the utility.

Building on a multi-building site (e.g. a university campus) Maybe smaller sites must be regarded as buildings?

Most large university campus nowadays. Schools and hospitals more common for the whole site.

Unusual. Sometimes for service hot water.

Most large university campus nowadays, sometimes in hospital sites. Schools typically the whole site

Other

From 1 January 2009 all electric utilities must base the costs on metered energy, which means that all utility meters must be read at least monthly, compared to presently annually for minor users. Since reading meters is costly all utilities will change the meters so they can be read hourly remotely. So when EPBD really comes into force in Sweden there will be good possibilities to get electricity readings, except that landlords do not have access to tenants electricity if they have their own contracts.

Page 222: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 5 February 2005

0.8 Floor area definitions in your country

Floor area name

Definition In accordance with the Swedish Standard SS 02 10 53 - 1999

BTA = Bruttoarea Gross external floor area: measured outside the external walls BRA = Bruksarea = LOA + ÖVA + BOA + BIA

≈ Gross internal floor area: measured inside the external walls, less partitions between tenants, area of shafts for ducts, pipes and wires as well as thick inner walls etc. (> 300 mm)

LOA = Lokalarea Premises area: floor area used by the activity in the building; usually dived into sub areas. The rents are usually based on LOA.

LOA:V = Lokalarea för verksamhet Floor area used directly by the activity in the building, including storage, computer rooms, etc. Corridors etc. inside a tenant’s space are also included.

LOA:P = Lokalarea för personal Floor area for the personnel: toilets, tea kitchens, rooms for coats, gym for the personnel, etc.

LOA:K = Lokalarea för kommunikation Floor area for communication between tenants on the same floor LOA:B= Lokalarea för garage Floor area for indoor parking, parking houses ÖVA = Övriga area Other floor area that is not used by the activity in the building; usually

dived into sub areas: ÖVA:D = Övrig area för drift Other floor area for mechanical rooms including shafts for ducts, pipes and wires,

rooms for air handling units, chillers, boilers, elevator machinery, electrical rooms, etc.

ÖVA:K = Övrig area för kommunikation Other floor area for communication inside the building e.g. stairwells, lifts, corridors from the entrance to tenants’ spaces, etc.

BOA = Bostadsarea Living area: floor area used for residential units, uncommon in premises buildings

BIA = Biarea Secondary area in residential buildings, e.g. common laundry rooms, rooms for bicycles and prams, storage areas for the residential units in basements or attics, etc.

Page 223: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 6 February 2005

Page 224: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 7 February 2005

Sector 1: Public administration offices 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

Any kind of building used for administration by municipalities, counties or the state. The sector also

includes buildings for administration of justice (courts on different levels), police headquarters and youth recreation centres. Buildings used by the states’ commercial activities (e.g. the state owned electric utility Vattenfall, formerly the Swedish State Power Board, but nowadays one of the largest electric generators and district heating companies in Germany) are not included. The majority of the buildings is probably owned by public limited companies, and not directly by municipalities, counties or the state. “General Buildings” (taxation category code 828) are treated as public buildings in Sweden.

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number (of buildings

over 1,000 m²) Town hall unknownSocial security office unknown“General buildings” Total number of buildings 5 – 8,000 1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office Very common B open plan office Common in buildings from 1970s and from late

1990s C computer/server room Common in “office buildings” D debating chamber In town and county halls E meeting room Very common F kitchen (LOA:P) Common, particularly “tea kitchens” G restaurant In larger buildings H reception Common I Other 1 (please specify) J Other 2 (please specify) K Other 3 (please specify) L Other 4 (please specify)

Page 225: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 8 February 2005

1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Svenska Kommunförbundet = The Swedish Association of Local Authorities

Municipalities are major owners of administration buildings

B Svenska Landstingsförbundet = The Federation of Swedish County Councils

Counties are large owners of administration buildings and hospitals

C Per Widén Statens Fastighetsverk (SFV) = National Property Board of Sweden

Owns our “national cultural heritage”, many governmental offices in Stockholm, etc.

D Gunilla Haglund Vasakronan AB State owned property company, owns still many state administration buildings, court houses and police headquarters

E Hans-Åke Ivarsson Lokalförsörjningsförvaltningen i Göteborgs Stad (LFF) = Premises supply administration of the City of Gothenburg

Manage a few administration buildings in Gothenburg, (non-schools are 346,501 m² LOA, 375 objects)

F Handelshus i Göteborg AB (HIGAB) = Business houses in Gothenburg Ltd

Municipality owned company, owns many administration buildings in Gothenburg

G H

Page 226: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 9 February 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use [average area specific in 2003]

Estimate of total floor area for the sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating

Other

Total heatingUnits (1,000 m²) kWh/a, m²

Town hall Social security office Sub-sector 3 Sub-sector 4 Total for the sector code 828 7,100±1,200

(standard error) (incl 4,900 directly publicly owned)

83 UFOS

UFOS: 110 SCB: 126±2 SCB: (130±2

incl. cooling)

Municipalities: Public administration bldgs 2003(346 objects, 793.00 m², 21 of 289 municpalities)

0

50

100

150

200

250

0 50 100 150 200 250

Electricity [kWh/a, m² BRA]

Hea

ting

[kW

h/, m

² BR

A]

Data for 2003 from the U.F.O.S. data base. Zeros must be bad data. Electricity probably includes electricity for heating.

Page 227: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 10 February 2005

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

Floor area

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation BRA (= Useful area ≈ Gross internal area): Measured inside the external walls, less partitions between tenants, area for shafts and thick internal walls. In the future BTA = Gross external area is proposed for simplicity reasons.

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy Degree days: four major climatic zones exists, but DD is available for about 300 locations in 10 zones. Room temperature is 17°C. Heating limits for each month: A day during the following months gives 0 DD if the average outdoor temperature is higher than April 12°C; May, June, July 10°C: August 11°C; September 12°C; October 13°C Energy signature is also used, but not common.

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other Really old data (around 1990) are available from the STIL-study and from other

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades The Swedish Building Code has always been concentrated on heating and a good building shell. It is currently under revisions and the existing draft will probably (hopefully!) be very revised

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc The Energy Authority published good practice number for installed lighting power in the mid 1990s and at the same time good practice values of Specific Fan Power were published by e.g. the Society of Swedish HVAC Engineers..

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1 Insurance companies study I

2 Insurance companies study II

3 STIL-study

4

5

6

Page 228: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 11 February 2005

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

5.2 Low energy design guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 229: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 12 February 2005

Page 230: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 13 February 2005

Sector 2: Higher education (Universities, Colleges of Further Education, etc) 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

Buildings used for teaching or research at schools run directly by the State, with funding from, or

supervision by the State. The sector also includes buildings with dormitories in connection with schools, which exists at some HE colleges (mainly some folk high schools). However, most of these schools are not on the higher education level, but are on the secondary school level. In the statistics all school buildings are lumped together, from nursery schools to universities. Most university buildings are owned by the state owned public limited company Akademiska Hus. This company has an average market share of 68 %, divided on 76 % in university cities and 31% in cities with HE colleges. Other major owners are directly, or indirectly, municipalities or private companies. Very few HE institutions own their buildings, more or less only Chalmers owns part of the campus in Gothenburg. “School Buildings” (taxation category code 825) are treated as public buildings in Sweden Statistics Sweden lump all schools buildings, from preschool to university, into one group.

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Universities There are 15 universities (with right to exam Ph.D.s) at

11 places in Sweden with totally 266,600 students. The universities have from 1,700 to 38,000 students each (average 18,500). The age of the buildings wary from the 1500s to new-built advanced research laboratories. Akademiska Hus has annually invested 2,000-3,000 MSEK (220-330 M€) in new or refurbished buildings during the last decade.

HE Colleges There are 17 HE colleges in Sweden at 17 places in Sweden, most with strong local ambitions to become universities. The total number of students is 148,500 and the colleges have from 700 to 17,000 students (average 8,700). Most of these colleges are in new buildings or in refurbished old military barracks, etc.

Artistic Colleges There are 9 artistic colleges in Sweden, all located in Stockholm; examples are Royal College of Music, Royal University College of Fine Arts, University College of Dance, and University College of Opera. They have altogether 3,500 students with nearly 1,000 at the University College of Film, Radio, Television and Theatre.

Smaller HE Colleges In addition there are 19 smaller HE Colleges in Sweden, the majority of these have some kind of religious or psychotherapy curriculum. Together they have 3,400 students. These colleges either own their buildings or rent from municipalities/private companies.

All type of school buildings (Total number of buildings 20 – 25,000)

Page 231: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 14 February 2005

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office Very common B open plan office Uncommon, but maybe in never buildings C computer/server room Very common D lecture theatre Very common E meeting room Very common F kitchen Very common, particularly tea kitchens G restaurant Common on larger campuses but typically run buy

the Student Unions, who typically own their houses. Usually the facility management is carried out in cooperation with the owner of the university buildings

H reception Common I dry sports Uncommon, but common in Student Unions’ houses J swimming pool Uncommon, but sometimes in Student Unions’

houses K research laboratory, workshop Common at larger universities L residential (bedrooms, etc) Non, Student dormitories are typically run by

companies owned by the Student Unions M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Tomas Hallén Akademiska Hus AB 68% markets share of HE buildings. Technical director of the mother company

B Stellan Olson Akademiska Hus i Göteborg AB Technical director of the Gothenburg branch of Akademiska Hus

C Per Widén Statens Fastighetsverk (SFV) = National Property Board of Sweden

Owns our “national cultural heritage”, including many older university buildings in mainly Uppsala and Lund.

D E F G H

Page 232: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 15 February 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use [average area specific in 2003]

Estimate of total floor area for

the sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating

Other Total Heating

Units (000 m²) kWh/a, m² kWh/a, m²Universities

HE Colleges

Artistic Colleges

Smaller HE Colleges

Total for sector only Akademiska Hus

about 4,800 3,257

110

111

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

Floor area

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation Akademiska Hus uses BTA = Gross external floor area in their environmental reports. Internally Akademiska Hus always uses LOA = premises area, on which the rents are based. Most other landlords probably uses LOA or BRA.

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy Degree days: four major climatic zones exists, but DD is available for about 300 locations in 10 zones. Room temperature is 17°C. Heating limits for each month: A day during the following months gives 0 DD if the average outdoor temperature is higher than April 12°C; May, June, July 10°C: August 11°C; September 12°C; October 13°C Energy signature is also used, but not common.

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other Akademiska Hus has started a major project to get data from energy meters (major and sub-meters) into a database. All data are as hourly averages. So far the system works passable for two or three facility management areas in Uppsala and Stockholm. In a couple of years time the monitoring system will cover all buildings of Akademiska Hus

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

Page 233: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 16 February 2005

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

5.2 Low energy design guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 234: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 17 February 2005

Sector 3: Schools 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

Buildings used for teaching or research at schools run directly by the State, with funding from, or

supervision by the State. The sector also includes buildings with dormitories in connection with schools, which exists at some secondary schools (mainly folk high schools). In the statistics all school buildings are lumped together, from nursery schools to universities. The municipalities own most schools directly or indirectly. However private schools with state funding/supervision have increased strongly the last decade. “School Buildings” (taxation category code 825) are treated as public buildings in Sweden Statistics Sweden lump all schools buildings, from preschool to university, into one group.

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Nursery schools Preschools

Children of the age about 0,5 to 6 years. The number of children in nursery schools is 400-500,000. Compulsory pre-school for 6 years old children. For children 7 to 12 years there is a voluntary childcare system, mainly for afternoons when the primary school is over. The total number of children between 0 to12 years old in the Swedish childcare system (including nursery schools/preschools) is 1,45 million. There are about 20,500 units of nursery schools/preschools and about 5,800 “afternoon child care” units. Typically a nursery school/preschool consists of a handful of units. Buildings often from mid-1970 and later. They are often a part of a multi-family building or a primary school.

“Primary” schools Nine-year compulsory school for all children of the age 7 to 16 years. Number of pupils is 1,050,000, out of which 980,000 are in municipality run schools. Buildings of any age from late 1800s to today. Buildings, for children 13 to 16 years old, from the 1970s and later are often more like upper secondary schools

Upper secondary schools

Three-year voluntary school for children 17 to 19 years. The total number of pupils is about 250,000. Buildings of any age from late 1800s to today.

Folk high schools, etc.

0,5 to 2 years voluntary school for people 18 years to any age, mainly concentrating on special curricula, e.g. artistic, political, sustainable development, etc., etc. Currently there are at least 148 folk high schools in Sweden. Folk high schools often have residential areas.

Total for Sector 2 & 3 Total number of school buildings including buildings for universities and HE colleges

20 – 25,000

Page 235: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 18 February 2005

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office Common B open plan office Uncommon C computer/server room Common in secondary schools D lecture theatre Sometimes in secondary schools E meeting room Common F kitchen All schools make lunches G restaurant All schools make lunches H reception Common I dry sports Almost all primary & secondary schools J swimming pool Very uncommon K research laboratory, workshop Chemistry teaching laboratories in secondary

schools L residential (bedrooms, etc) Only in folk high schools, etc. M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Hans-Åke Ivarsson Lokalförsörjningsförvaltningen i Göteborgs Stad (LFF) = Premises supply administration of the City of Gothenburg

Manage almost all nursery schools (preschools) and schools in Gothenburg (1,450,800 m² BRA or 1,392,839 m² LOA); 654 preschools and schools (1,046,338 m² LOA)

B C D E F G H

Page 236: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 19 February 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use [average area specific in 2003]

Estimate of total floor area for the sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating

Other Total heating

Units (000 m²) kWh/a, m² kWh/a, m²Nursery schools Preschools

Incl elec heat. UFOS 124

UFOS 126

“Primary” schools

Incl elec. heat. UFOS 70

UFOS 133

Upper Secondary Schools

Folk high schools, etc.

Total for sector incl. universities and HE colleges

SCB “Schools” 37,300±1,200 Code 825 21,000 ±600 (standard error)

Not known

SCB 140

Municipalities: Nursery schools/preschools 2003(1,277 objects, 636,663 m², 23 municipalities of 290)

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

0 50 100 150 200 250 300

Electricity [kWh/a, m² BRA]

Heat

ing

[kW

h/a,

m² B

RA]

Municipalities: Schools 2003(1,153 objects. 4,305,515 m², 24 municipalities of 289)

0

50

100

150

200

250

300

0 50 100 150 200 250 300

Electricity [kWh/a, m² BRA]

Heat

ing

[kW

h/a,

m² B

RA]

Data from the U.F.O.S. database. Zeros must be bad data. Electricity probably includes electricity for heating. Nursery schools/preschools are commonly electrically heated 2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

Floor area

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation BRA (= Usefull area ≈ Gross internal area): Measured inside the external walls less partitions between tenants, area for shafts and thick internal walls. In the future BTA = Gross external area is proposed for simplicity reasons.

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy

Page 237: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 20 February 2005

Degree days: four major climatic zones exists, but DD is available for about 300 locations in 10 zones. Room temperature is 17°C. Heating limits for each month: A day during the following months gives 0 DD if the average outdoor temperature is higher than April 12°C; May, June, July 10°C: August 11°C; September 12°C; October 13°C Energy signature is also used, but not common.

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1 Gothenburg schools rating study

Ongoing energy audits including indoor climate conditions in x

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

Page 238: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 21 February 2005

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

5.2 Low energy design guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 239: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 22 February 2005

Page 240: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 23 February 2005

Sector 4: Sports centres 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

Building used for bath, sports, etc. to which the public has access.

Sports centres etc. are commonly owned directly or indirectly by the municipalities, but about 1/3 of the floor area is owned in other ways. “Bath and Sports Buildings” (taxation category code 824) are treated as public buildings in Sweden

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Dry sports centre Centre with swimming pool There is probably at least one bath centre in every

municipality at least 250 -300

Centre with ice rink There is probably at least one indoor ice rink in every municipality (ice hockey is very popular)

at least 250-350

Total for the sector

Total number of buildings 8 – 10,000

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office Common in personnel areas B open plan office Uncommon C computer/server room Uncommon D lecture theatre None E meeting room One or two at each centre in the personnel areas F kitchen Common with cafes, etc, also tea kitchens for the

personnel G restaurant Only in the largest centres H reception Always I indoor dry sports Dry sport centres J swimming pool Bath centres K changing facilities Always L outdoor sports Not uncommon with a football field or a jogging

track with outdoor lighting, also outdoor ice rinks are not uncommon (ice hockey and bandy very popular)

M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Hans-Åke Ivarsson Lokalförsörjningsförvaltningen i Göteborgs Stad (LFF) = Premises supply administration of the City of Gothenburg

Manage a few bath and sports centres in Gothenburg, (non-schools are 346,501 m² LOA, 375 objects)

B Lokalförsörjningsförvaltningen i Göteborgs Stad (LFF) = Premises supply administration of the City of

Page 241: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 24 February 2005

Gothenburg C D E F G H

Page 242: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 25 February 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use [average area specific in 2003]

Estimate of total floor area for the sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating Other Total heating [kWh/a, m²]

Units (000 m²) Dry sports centre

Centre with swimming pool

Centre with ice rink

Sub-sector 4

Total for sector

5,700±600 Code 824 5,600±600

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

Floor area

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation BRA (= Usefull area ≈ Gross internal area): Measured inside the external walls less partitions between tenants, area for shafts and thick internal walls. In the future BTA = Gross external area is proposed for simplicity reasons.

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy Degree days: four major climatic zones exists, but DD is available for about 300 locations in 10 zones. Room temperature is 17°C. Heating limits for each month: A day during the following months gives 0 DD if the average outdoor temperature is higher than April 12°C; May, June, July 10°C: August 11°C; September 12°C; October 13°C Energy signature is also used, but not common.

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

Page 243: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 26 February 2005

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

5.2 Low energy design guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 244: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 27 February 2005

Sector 5: Hospitals and other Health Facilities 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

The counties (who can tax their inhabitants) run most of the health sector in Sweden. In recent years a

few large hospitals have been privatised, but this trend is politically very debated. There are 21 counties who runs general hospitals and day care (health care) centres. The number of counties has decreased in recent years due to a trend to merge counties into larger regions, e.g. the Region of Scania (Skåne) was a merger of two counties and the Region of West Gothia (Västra Götalands-regionen) was a merger of three counties and a large city. The Swedish hospitals have on average about 29,000 available beds and the number of visits to doctors is 25.7 million annually. Of these 18.3 million is to county run hospitals and health care centres, whereas 7.4 million are to private health companies, private doctors, etc. Five of the regional (university) hospitals have more than 800 beds. “Buildings for care” are defined as buildings for health care or geriatric care (old people’s home), for care of addicts (alcohol/drugs), criminals (i.e. prisons), mentally retarded or community homes for youths (am. juvenile correctional facilities). “Buildings for care” (taxation category code 823) are treated as public buildings in Sweden.

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² General hospital There were 76 major hospitals in Sweden in 2001.

These hospitals are administrative units and not actual sites. The Sahlgrenska University Hospital in Gothenburg e.g. consists of three large sites in the Greater Gothenburg area and in the Region of West Gothia 7 separate hospital sites are shown as only 2 hospitals. The Swedish hospitals where in 2001 divided into: 9 regional hospitals including university hospitals (5-6) 22 county hospitals 43 part of count hospitals 2 private hopitals

Day care centre There is about 1,000 day care centres (health care centres) in Sweden. The majority of these are not a whole building, but a part of a multi-family or non-residential building. Only the largest consist of one or a few buildings. As an example the Region a West Gothia runs about 160 health care centres, but manages only the 28 largest them self.

Doctors’ surgery These are very seldom a whole building typically a part of a multi-family or non-residential building

Total for the sector

Total number of buildings 20 – 25,000

Page 245: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 28 February 2005

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office Common B open plan office Uncommon C computer/server room Common D lecture theatre Only in regional/university hospitals E meeting room Very common F kitchen Common, particularly tea kitchens for the personnel G restaurant Common in most major hospitals H reception Always I research laboratory Typically only in regional/university hospitals J swimming pool Typically only in regional/university hospitals

(treatment of rheumatism, etc.) K operating theatre Common in hospitals L wards (overnight accommodation) Always in hospitals M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Norman Weber Västfastigheter – Property company of Västra Götalandsregionen (Region of West Gothia)

Next largest owner of health care buildings in Sweden (1,983,400 m²) only the County of Greater Stockholm is somewhat larger.

B Urban Holm Locum - Property company of Stockholms läns landsting (County of Greater Stockholm)

Largest owner of health care buildings in Sweden (1,984,600 m²)

C D E F G H

Page 246: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 29 February 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use [average area specific in 2003]

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating Other

Units (000 m²) General hospital

Day care centre

Doctors’ surgery

Sub-sector 4

Total for sector

UFOS: SCB:

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

Floor area

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation BRA (= Usefull area ≈ Gross internal area): Measured inside the external walls less partitions between tenants, area for shafts and thick internal walls. In the future BTA = Gross external area is proposed for simplicity reasons.

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy Degree days: four major climatic zones exists, but DD is available for about 300 locations in 10 zones. Room temperature is 17°C. Heating limits for each month: A day during the following months gives 0 DD if the average outdoor temperature is higher than April 12°C; May, June, July 10°C: August 11°C; September 12°C; October 13°C Energy signature is also used, but not common.

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

Page 247: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 30 February 2005

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

5.2 Low energy design guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 248: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 31 February 2005

Sector 6: Hotels and Restaurants 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

The Swedish hotel and restaurant business contained in 2004 of around 1,600 hotels and 13,400

restaurants. The hotels had 90,000 rooms, which gives an availability of 32.8 million guest nights. In 2004 the demand was 14.9 million guest nights. A voluntary star classification system was introduced in Sweden as late as in 2003. The number of stars is from one to five and the system is very similar to the Danish from 1997. So far about 550 hotels out of about 1,100, who are members of SHR, have been classified. A majority of the independent hotels (850) has less than 50 rooms; 135 independent hotels have 50 to 100 rooms and only 47 independent hotels have more than 100 rooms. Major hotel chains have 232 hotels and major hotel marketing organisations include 273 hotels. The size of these hotels is not known. In addition there are 87 residential study centres (kursgårdar), which stands on two legs: weekday corporate courses and rural private weekend breaks.

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings over 1,000 m²

Bed & breakfast These are not so common in Sweden, on the other hand there is about 500 youth hostels (vandrarhem) which have much higher standard than in most other countries 1 star hotels: 7 2 star hotels: 16

Business hotel

3 star hotels: 285 4 star hotels: 229

Luxury hotel

5 star hotels: 10

Hotels, total This is the number of premises from Statistics Sweden, probably the total number of buildings is 2-3 times the number of premises. But this number is very confusing since there are about 2,100 hotels and youth hotels

Unknown at least 5,700 > 200 m² at least 1,260 > 1,000 m²

Restaurants A restaurant is seldom so big that it forms a separate building. The great majority is a part of a multi-family of non-residential buildings, except the ones who are a part of a hotel. This is the number of premises from Statistics Sweden, probably the total number of buildings is 2-3 times the number of premises

Unknown at least 2,900 > 200 m² at least 220 > 1,000 m²

Page 249: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 32 February 2005

1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office Common in administrative areas B open plan office Uncommon C computer/server room Server rooms in larger hotels D residential (bedrooms, etc) In all hotels E meeting room In all business/luxury hotels F kitchen G restaurant In all business/luxury hotels H reception Always I indoor dry sports Common in luxury hotels J swimming pool Common in luxury hotels K retail outlets Common in luxury hotels L bar In almost all business/luxury hotels M other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Sveriges Hotell & Restaurang-förtagares förbund (SHR) = Swedish Hotel & Restaurant Association

Organises the majority of Swedish hotels (70 %) and the large restaurants (20 %). SHR’s members stand for about 80 % of the turnover of the hotel & restaurant business in Sweden

B C D E F G H

Page 250: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 33 February 2005

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use [average area specific in 2003]

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating Other Heating total [kWh/m², a}

Units (000 m²) Bed & breakfast

Business hotel

Luxury hotel

Hotels, total

6,300 ±400 (standard error)

Unknown

Restaurants

1,200±100 (standard error)

Unknown

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

Floor area

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation BRA (= Usefull area ≈ Gross internal area): Measured inside the external walls less partitions between tenants, area for shafts and thick internal walls. In the future BTA = Gross external area is proposed for simplicity reasons.

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy Degree days: four major climatic zones exists, but DD is available for about 300 locations in 10 zones. Room temperature is 17°C. Heating limits for each month: A day during the following months gives 0 DD if the average outdoor temperature is higher than April 12°C; May, June, July 10°C: August 11°C; September 12°C; October 13°C Energy signature is also used, but not common.

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

Page 251: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in Sweden LJr 12 May 2005

Page 34 February 2005

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

5.2 Low energy design guides

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

Page 252: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

Appendix National Review – United Kingdom

Page 253: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Sector 1: Public Administration in UK

Page 1 9-Apr-05

Sector 1: Public Administration

1 Description of sector

1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

Public administration buildings in the UK include Central Government buildings (“the Civil Estate”) and Local Authority buildings. Debatably, they could also include public sector agencies, but the government may now regard these as non-governmental. Although mostly offices, the estate includes other kinds of buildings, e.g. courthouses, defence establishments, laboratories, police stations, prisons and workshops. Defence Estates buildings are also included, but it is unlikely that they will be covered by the Directive, at least initially. Nevertheless, we have started to examine them because they include whole sites, both ordinary and unusual buildings, and there has been an attempt on ECG 075 to put them all on a common basis.

Over the past twenty years, many buildings which used to be in public ownership or occupancy, e.g. post offices, warehouses and transportation facilities have become privatised and have left the sector. Public sector organisations also increasingly occupy rented space, either speculative, privately developed under private-public partnerships (PPP) and the private finance initiative (PFI), or through sale and leaseback arrangements. They are therefore increasingly subject to landlord/tenant/manger splits in responsibility. In the private sector, such splits have been a major disincentive to energy-related investment and management measures, by both landlord and tenant. The public sector hopes to avoid this by performance-based contracting, but whether this works in practice remains to be seen – early examples have not been encouraging but the EPBD might change this.

Unfortunately, the UK Government’s intentions regarding mandatory certification and display have not yet been announced, and are now delayed by the election, probably until July. However, when last discussed, ODPM, the Ministry responsible, was minded to limit initial display to public buildings over 1000 m2 frequently visited by the public. This would exclude many offices. Nevertheless we are including offices here; so most of the rest of this form is about public sector and public administration offices alone, because these are the sectors nominated in the EPLabel contract, and provide the bridge to the earlier Europrosper method for commercial offices.

However, if there is time and budget in EPLabel, we also wish to attempt a classification of all public sector buildings. For local authority best value indicators, ODPM regards “operational property” as all property apart from housing and schools, and specifically refers to libraries, residential homes, day centres, cemeteries, crematoria, museums, galleries and car parks. Sports centres and swimming pools are also mentioned, but these are already in EPLabel’s Sector 4. [In ODPM terminology, “Non-operational” buildings (normally rented out to outsourced contractors or to third patries) include tenanted farms, depots, retail, industrial buildings, workshops, historic buildings, markets, docklands, slipways and moorings].

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors (this table currently deals with office premises only) Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of offices* England UK

Central government offices

Self explanatory, based on WBA 1985 data, the stock model does not give numbers

9,000 TBA

Local authority offices Includes town, district and county halls (which can be large) and branch offices of various kinds, which can be small.

5,600 TBA

NOTE; WBA data collected in 1994 using statistics from 1985 then suggested 8000 local authority offices. Presumably the figure has fallen owing to rationalisation and outsourcing, but may be rising again owing to decentralising to local services – but most of these smaller offices would be below the 1000m2 threshold. TABLE 2.1 USES THE OLD WBA DATA BECAUSE THIS IS MORE CONSISTENT INTERNALLY

Council branch offices These buildings are often quite small and local, and would tend to be under the 1000 m2 initial certification threshold.

*The statistics above are derived from data on the UK Nondomestic Building Stock Model, using data mostly from 1994 and mostly from the Valuation Office, which operates the UK property taxation system. The main publication is the Non-Domestic Energy Fact File (1998), together with unpublished input from its authors supplied both recently and in 1994. The Valuation Office database has just been updated for the UK 2005 rating review, and updated summary tables are promised for the end of 2005. Rather than attempting to update it, we have therefore stuck with the 1994 data for the

Page 254: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Sector 1: Public Administration in UK

Page 2 9-Apr-05

time being. Unfortunately, the Valuation Office database does not include many public buildings as they are not subject to property taxation. However, it does include some premises (for example Town Halls) and this time it has also added commercial space occupied by public authority tenants, which was often previously ignored, particularly where the tenant occupied the whole building.

Note that Valuation Office data is not for “buildings” but for “hereditaments” (a hereditament is a unit of inheritable property). A hereditament may be larger than a building (e.g. a university campus) or smaller (e.g. a tenancy).

1.3 Description of types of spaces (excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets)

Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments to note exceptions

A Cellular office Very common in older buildings. However, current trends are to open plan.

B Open plan office Increasingly, since the 1960s and widespread now, both for new buildings and for older buildings being rebuilt or refurbished with much more open space. (Open planning tends to increase occupation densities, but energy densities increase still faster as they need more sophisticated engineering systems which have a tendency to default to ON.

C Computer room In most of the larger buildings, e.g. town and county halls, government departments and regional centres, though there are also separate data processing facilities. .

D lecture theatre In the larger government department buildings.

E meeting room Frequently

F kitchen Yes, in the larger buildings, often with hot meal preparation

G Restaurant In most of the larger buildings.

H Reception In most of the buildings over 1000 m2. However, some of the premises over 1000 m2 will be in rented buildings which may have a main reception in the landlord’s space.

J Dry sports Rare

K Swimming pool Rare

L Laboratory, workshop Occasionally in the larger buildings, though will often be in special purpose buildings outside the main office.

M Residential (bedrooms, etc) Occasional caretaker’s accommodation.

N Council chamber In most town, district and county halls

P Auditorium Common in town centre town halls circa 1860 - 1960

R Flat floor meeting hall/ exhibition space Common in town centre town halls circa 1860 - 1960

1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector

Name of individual Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Ann McMaster 0151-672 2252,

OGC, Office of Government Commerce (Energy

Government Agency for purchasing advice to central government departments (and

Page 255: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Sector 1: Public Administration in UK

Page 3 9-Apr-05

mobile 07779 725878 Procurement officer). indirectly to local government).

B ??? ODPM, Office of the Deputy Prime Minister, Land and Property Division

Responsible for public buildings

C Tony Whitehead Defence Estates (Chief Architect)

Responsible for all army, navy, air force and coastguard premises.

D Karen Turton 020-7974 3796

Energy Officer, London Borough of Camden

One of the 32 London Boroughs

E Allan Jones Energy Officer, Greater London Authority

Strategic Authority. Allan previously had great success as energy officer at Woking.

F John Watts Horsham District Council Local Authority contact for Europrosper

G

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector* 2.1 Estimate of total energy use Needs further work,

ideally a proper workbook with all

buildings

No in UK

Average size

Estimate of total floor area for sector*

Electricity Fossil fuel District heating

Total CO2

Units NIA (m²)

(000 m²) kWh/m²/yr kWh/m²/yr kWh/m²/yr kg/m²/year

Central Govt Offices 9000 1850 16,650 113 250 99.5Local Govt Offices 5600 2250 12,600 120 258 104.2 TWh/year mtonnes/yrTotals for sector 29,250 3.4 7.4 minimal 3.0

*WBA report to National Power (1994). Derived from statistics for England and Wales from the UK Nondomestic Building Stock Model. Figures for the UK need updating consistently when 2004 Valuation Office data is available. 2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data

Floor area.

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

Stock statistics are mostly in NIA net internal area (also known as net lettable) in the figures above. This is the normal Valuation Office metric for commercial office space.

Energy statistics in GPG 286 (reference 5.1A) are in treated floor area (TFA)

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy For offices, Reference 5.1A and B makes weather corrections to a 2462 heating degree-days at a 15.5°C base. 2462 was chosen for the initial energy guides in the 1970s as the 20-year average of the eighteen degree-day regions for the UK over the previous two decades. The figure needs review, owing to climate change, which has reduced the average by nearly 10%, and population density (most people are in the south). The adjustment is made for fossil fuel only (those in buildings with electric heating are asked to refer upwards for advice) and, oddly, to 100% of its consumption.

There is no normalisation for exposure

There is no normalisation for cooling.

(NOTE FOR DEFENCE BUILDINGS. These do normalise the heating percentage of fossil fuel use only. For electric heating, the allowance for delivered electricity is 0.76 times the fossil fuel benchmark, which seems high).

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available

3.1 Describe what is available e.g. Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Page 256: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Sector 1: Public Administration in UK

Page 4 9-Apr-05

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc

Categorise as national standard, research data or other

The national standard for central government offices is Good Practice Guide GPG 276 (publication 5.1 A). This was derived from Energy Consumption Guide ECG 019 for commercial offices by somebody who didn’t fully understand the principles upon which ECG 019 was based. Benchmarks are provided for four Types of office.

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems

Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

See 5.2

4. Data from building case studies

Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study.

Name of study Data available Date

1 Case study of Hereford & Worcester County Hall, Energy Efficiency Best Practice Case Study No 17

A purpose-built low energy building, new in 1977.

Breakdown of energy into end uses (in kWh/m2 TFA, normalised). Gas 90 heating, 8 hot water, 2.5 catering. Electricity 10 cooling, 13 fans pumps & controls, 44 lighting, 5 office equipment, 20 computer room, 8 telecoms, 2.5 catering, 1.5 miscellaneous.

1990

Old data. Clearly the use will have changed and electrical intensity for office equipment increased, but at the time performance was good for a mixed mode building including mechanical ventilation and cooling. Telecoms high because it used an early electronic exchange based on mainframe computer technology in an air-conditioned room. Since the survey, the lighting has been refurbished and we understand that the load and energy use has been more than halved.

2

5. Publications

5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

5.1A Energy Efficiency Good Practice Guide GPG 286, Energy performance in the government’s civil estate (38 pages, available on web site: http://www.thecarbontrust.co.uk/energy/pages/publication_search.asp). For central government

Page 257: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Sector 1: Public Administration in UK

Page 5 9-Apr-05

offices. Could also be used by local government offices. The technical and benchmark data is taken from ECG 19 (reference 5.1B below), but GPG 286 gives the user more assistance in working things out.

5.1B Energy Consumption Guide ECG 019, Energy use in offices, (24 pages, available on web site: http://www.thecarbontrust.co.uk/energy/pages/publication_search.asp). This is written for offices with one occupier, either the owner or a tenant who occupies and manages the whole building (multi-tenanted offices tend to use more energy for a variety of reasons).

5.1C Government Estate energy benchmarking tool, This combines ECG 075, GPG286 (reference 5.1B above) with GPG 311 and GPG 312, and interactive calculation proformas in a CD, CDGE1. This is available free on request from http://www.thecarbontrust.co.uk/energy/pages/publication_search.asp

It also includes a similar procedure for defence buildings, derived from Energy consumption Guide ECG 75, Energy use in Ministry of Defence establishments. This provides single (not Typical or Good Practice) benchmarks for fossil fuel and for electricity consumption, sometimes broken down into end-uses, for:

• Catering, by meal, for four different grades of facility, plus associated building services energy use.

• Hangars, by fossil fuel and electricity, by floor area, for five types of hangar. Equipment and humidty control, where present, are dealt with separately.

• Messes, with residential accomodation and some catering (catering is assessed separately as above).

• Multi-occupancy accommodation, including catering. • Workshops, storage and motor transport facilities. • Offices. 3 categories: naturally ventilated cellular, naturally ventilated open plan, and forced

ventilated. For sites which have no submeters, a summation method is also provided. ECG 075 and the CD also mention special energy uses including, security buildings, 24-hour occupation, medical facilities, churches, social facilities, emergency facilities, NAAFI, abnormal process loads and external lighting. It recommends sub-metering all these, so the patterns of energy use can be understood and if necessary subtracted from the site total.

5.1D ECG 087, Energy Use in Local Authority buildings, (Carbon Trust, 2004) deals with a range of buildings including offices, sports, libraries, museums, sheltered housing, housing for the homeless, community centres, day centres, depots and car parks.

5.1E Rethinking construction, the movement for innovation sustainability working group report: Environmental performance indicators for sustainable construction. See http://www.constructingexcellence.org.uk/

5.2

5.2A

5.2B

Low energy design guides

GIL

5.3

5.3A

5.3B

Energy efficiency/saving advice

5.4 Other useful references

5.4A

5.4B

C Pout et al, Non-domestic building energy fact file, Construction Research Communications, Building Research Establishment Report BR 339 (1998), ISBN 1-80861-205-8

Page 258: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for HE sector in UK

Page 1 April 2005

Sector 2: Higher education (Universities, Colleges of Further Education, etc) 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

The UK HE sector comprises 117 University Institutions and 54 Colleges of HE. The sector

demonstrates considerable variations: older universities tend to promote academic and research excellence, international standing and reputation; many ‘new universities’, ex-polytechnics vested in 1992, are less strongly research-led and more focused on vocational education; HE colleges are specialist institutions, many concentrating on particular subject disciplines, including art and design, education, agriculture, the health professions and other professional/vocational areas. There are some differences between the two groups in terms of physical infrastructure and management. The Russell Group of older universities, whilst comprising about a quarter of the total number of institutions, probably account for half the energy consumption and carbon emissions, since much research activity is energy intensive. Estates teams in older established universities have been in place since the foundation of the institution, and often have a large direct labour organisation. Post-1992 universities have estates teams that have often been created at the time of vesting, or taken over from local authority control, and frequently include a greater proportion of out-sourced labour. Management teams in all universities face the same challenges. The sector is in a state of flux. The government has ambitious targets for increasing participation in HE, and student numbers are growing considerably. Senior management teams are focused on the core challenges of e-learning, curriculum development, research grading, falling government income, merger activity, reducing unit costs, etc. For estates managers, where responsibility for EPBD implementation will rest, key issues are maintenance backlogs, managing new build projects, and making efficient use of space. Legislation-driven activity is dominated by issues such as disabled access requirements, asbestos risk management and fire safety, where large sums are being spent on upgrading assets, or disposing of those that cannot be brought up to the necessary specification. Against this background, and in the absence of regulatory drivers, energy management and energy efficiency investment tends to be discretionary, non-core and low priority. Some 40 universities are also subject to regulatory control under the EU Emissions Trading Scheme (ETS). The effect of this may not be large, since the total energy cost burden to universities seems relatively small, perhaps around 1% of turnover, despite recent increases in the price of energy and the prospect of further rises, and therefore not a priority for finance directors. Although awareness of the EPBD is still low in the sector, it may well be welcomed by many as the excuse they need to do something tangible on climate change. The crunch questions for implementation of Article 7.3 will be how to define what constitutes a building and how readily the sector will be able to match their existing energy metering arrangements with such a definition.

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Universities See above ???? HE Colleges See above ???? 1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets)

Page 259: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for HE sector in UK

Page 2 April 2005

Main elements of schedule of accommodation

Comments to note exceptions

A cellular office B open plan office C computer/server room D lecture theatre E meeting room Includes classrooms, tutorial areas, seminar and common rooms F kitchen G Restaurant and bar Includes canteens and refectories H reception I dry sports J swimming pool K research laboratory, workshop L residential (bedrooms, etc) Includes washing facilities M Library Includes learning resource centres and reading rooms 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to

be represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation on IAG

A Patrick Finch Director of Estates, University of Bath

Representative of University pro active on climate change, and AUDE

B Martyn Newton Building Services Manager (?), University of East Anglia

Pioneer procurer of low energy buildings

C Andrew Rabeneck Director of Estates, Imperial College

Representative of London Universities and AUDE

D ??? University of Cambridge ??? E ??? University of Oxford ??? F Ian Knight Welsh School of Architecture,

University of Wales Researcher specialising in energy data for universities

G Phil Jones South Bank University Researcher specialising in energy benchmarks for buildings

H ??? HEFCE Govt agency funding Universities in England

I ??? EAUC Co-ordinating association for environmental activity in HE sector

J ??? SCOP Representation from HE Colleges 2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Estimate of total

floor area for the sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating

Total CO2

Units (000 m²) mtonnes CO2 Universities

HE Colleges

Total for sector

45,000 3.3*

*From Carbon Trust brief for HE sector Carbon Management project (ECON 54 in 1998 quotes “at least 3mt CO2”) 2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other

Gross floor area (in ECON 54)

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

Page 260: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for HE sector in UK

Page 3 April 2005

No definition found (in ECON 54)

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy None found (in ECON 54)

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other There is one current ‘official’ energy benchmarking scheme for the HE sector: ECON 54 (publication 5.1A). This document provides “target consumption” yardsticks which are reproduced in the attached table. ECON 54 was published in 1998 but is primarily based on energy consumption data for the period ???? - ???? which was initially published in the Energy Efficiency Office Yellow Book in 1994 (publication 5.1B). The “Yellow Book” provides “low-medium” and “medium-high” consumption yardsticks. The “low-medium” and ECON 54 “target consumption” values are identical. ECON 54 offers 2 levels of Benchmarking: Level 1: Separately for the academic and residential building stock, the annual consumption of electricity and fossil fuel per m² of gross floor area are each compared with “target consumption” yardsticks for a “typical HE campus” which has the sector average mix of space types (teaching, research, etc). “Target consumption” yardsticks are understood to be equivalent to the lower quartile point of the background energy statistics, sometimes referred to in the UK as Good Practice. Level 2: As Level 1, except that the “target annual consumption” yardsticks for electricity and fossil fuel are calculated for the actual mix of space types for the HE campus concerned. This is done by building up the final composite yardstick from area weighted yardsticks for each individual space type. ECON 54 also provides advice on energy saving measures. Other data for “further and higher education” is reported in CIBSE Guide F (2005), from the reference: “Energy management study in the higher education sector”, Management Review Guide, Hefce, 1996. These are also reproduced in the attached table. The source of the CIBSE Guide F data quotes "High (Poor consumption)" values whereas Guide F describes these as Typical Practice. The Good practice benchmarks for residential halls of residence agree with the ECON 54 target yardsticks for residential buildings.

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades Universities follow general Building Regulations

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc None

3.5 Other

Page 261: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for HE sector in UK

Page 4 April 2005

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1 PROBE 1

A detailed review and energy audit of the following University buildings: Queen’s Building, de Montfort university, Learning resources centre, Anglia Polytechnic University

1996 1996

2 PROBE 2 Elizabeth Fry Building, University of East Anglia, The Portland Building, Portsmouth University

1998 1999

3 PROBE 3 Orchard Learning resources centre, University of Birmingham, Centre for Mathematical Sciences, University of Cambridge

2000 2002

4 EUBART

A detailed review and energy audit of the following University buildings: Visby Library, University of Gotland, Sweden Learning Resources Centre, University of Gloucestershire

2005 2005

5

5. Publications

Please include date and language if not English 5.1 5.1A 5.1B

Energy benchmarks for existing buildings ECG054 Energy Efficiency in Further and Higher Education - Cost Effective Low Energy Buildings Introduction to Energy Efficiency in Further and Higher Education, EEO, DoE, 1994.

5.2 5.2A 5.2B

5.2C 5.2D 5.2E 5.2F 5.2G 5.2H

Low energy design guides GPCS334 The benefits of including energy efficiency early in the design stage - Anglia Polytechnic University GPCS394 Cost-effective Energy Efficiency in Refurbished University Buildings - St Michael's House, University College Chichester GPCS396 Cost-effective Ventilation and Cooling in a New University Building GPG173 Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings and Extensions - for Schools and Colleges GPG207 Cost-effective Low Energy Buildings in Further and Higher Education NPCS102 The Queens Building De Montford University - feedback for designers & clients NPCS106 The Elizabeth Fry Building University of East Anglia - feedback for designers & clients GPG321 Energy efficiency in PFI/PPP contracts. Higher and further education.

5.3 5.3A

5.3B 5.3C 5.3D 5.3E 5.3F 5.3G 5.3H 5.3I 5.3J

Energy efficiency/saving advice GIR048 Passive Refurbishment at the Open University - Achieving Staff Comfort Through Improved natural ventilation GPCS016 Energy efficiency in offices. Heslington Hall, University of York GPCS042 Energy efficiency in higher education buildings: condensing gas boilers. GPCS333 Energy Management Practices in Further Education GPCS335 Investment in Energy Efficiency at the University of Warwick GPCS336 Energy Efficiency in Further and Higher Education GPCS351 CHP at a University Campus GPCS373 The economic benefits of using combined heat and power at Coventry University GPG232 Educated Energy - Good Housekeeping in Further and Higher Education Buildings GPG327 Energy monitoring and targeting systems for further and higher education.

5.4 5.4A

5.4B

Other useful references GPCS367 Student Energy Awareness Scheme - University of East Anglia - For Estate and Finance Departments GPG246 Building Management Systems in Further Education and Higher Education

5.5 HE Sector Stakeholders and Key Players for energy benchmarking

DfES (The Department for Education and Skills) is the UK government department responsible for HE

Page 262: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for HE sector in UK

Page 5 April 2005

sector funding and policy. In England much of the responsibility and authority for implementing government policy is transferred to HEFCE. HEFCE (Higher Education Funding Council for England) distributes public money for teaching and research to universities and colleges. An advisory group has been set up to produce a sustainability strategy and is chaired by HEFCE Director, Steve Egan. UUK (Universities UK) is represented by the Vice Chancellors of 120 universities and some colleges. SCOP (The Standing Conference of Principals Ltd) comprises the Heads of publicly-designated colleges and institutions of HE in England and Northern Ireland. AUDE (Association of University Directors of Estates) promotes excellence in the strategic planning, management, administration, operation and development of University Estates and Facilities. EAUC (The Environmental Association of Universities and Colleges) encourages the improvement of environmental performance throughout the HE sector by providing a forum for the exchange of information and the dissemination of best practice on environmental issues, including campus 'greening' and strategic environmental curriculum development. AUE (The Association of University Engineers) has representation (usually the Chief Engineer) from over 100 universities in the UK and Eire. Energy has been a key topic for this group over many years. HE Network (University Energy Managers Network) is an email and web-based discussion system for Members of Universities and Colleges, who have an interest in non domestic energy and environmental issues. It is funded by the Carbon Trust, under the Action Energy programme. HEEPI (The Higher Education Environmental Performance Improvement) is a project funded by HEFCE involving four universities - Bradford, Gloucestershire, Leeds Metropolitan and UMIST. It has close links with the Yorkshire Universities Association, the Joint Procurement Policy and Strategy Group and AUDE. It aims to stimulate environmental benchmarking within higher education by making better use of data already collected in the Key Estates Statistics, and by developing new indicators. HEPS (The Higher Education Partnership for Sustainability) has been working with 18 universities and colleges to deliver education in a way that boosts sustainable development. HEPS partners have been developing green buildings, cutting emissions and improving the curriculum. EEAS (The Energy Efficiency Accreditation Scheme) was established in 1993 by the energy efficiency industry to provide independent verification of the energy management achievements of organisations. The accrediting body for the Scheme is the Energy Institute and it is administered by the National Energy Foundation. To date 11 UK universities have been accredited for their achievements. Vice Chancellors (VCs) are in charge of deciding the direction of any policy concerning a university. Finance Directors (FDs) play a central role in approving expenditure and resource allocation. Their main concern is a strong business case justifying new initiatives. So far, investment in energy management has not been a priority area and has been difficult to prove a good business opportunity. Estates / Facilities Management Directors are involved in the formulation and implementation of university policy. They have the greatest responsibility for making sure there are real and satisfactory results from activities related to sustainability and energy/carbon management. Energy managers are responsible for implementing schemes for energy management approved by the senior management. Historically, they have also initiated projects for university facilities. Environmental Manager / Coordinators have been appointed by some universities to promote sustainability issues and manage specific actions. Academics (teaching and research) are rarely involved in operational issues and are often indifferent to energy management which can even be seen as interfering with their research activities. Support staff (engineering and maintenance) show relative indifference to energy-related initiatives. Student bodies, such as NUS and People and Planet, are typically enthusiastic about positive change and have applied pressure on university management to bring sustainability issues forward. The Executive Management Group has the ultimate say on any proposed initiative and decisions are often based predominantly on the cost implications. The VC and FD are well placed to steer their opinion and get approval for programmes they see as potentially beneficial to the university.

Page 263: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Schools Sector in UK

Page 1 March 2005

Sector 3: Schools

1 Description of sector

1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

The ‘schools’ sector covers all educational establishments for children aged from 3 to 18. It does not include playgroups and child minders. School sizes vary enormously, catering for anywhere between 20 and 3,000 pupils (nursery schools average 40 pupils, primary schools 210 pupils, secondary schools 1100). A school may consist of a single building or a site encompassing many buildings and facilities. Schools are owned by both the State (public sector) and private organisations, often classified as Educational Charities (the Independent sector). State schools are the responsibility of Local Education Authorities although expenditure on energy is often delegated to the school itself under the Local Management of Schools (LMS) arrangements. Energy consumption is usually specified per school ie not broken down by building, which might require a special clause in the EPBD implementation legislation.

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of schools* England UK

Nursery schools Day nurseries for children aged 3 to 4. 8,000 10,000

Primary schools Day schools for children aged 5 to 11 (or 13 in some of the Independent sector). Many primary schools also have nursery classes for children aged 3 to 4.

20,000 26,000

Secondary Schools Day schools for children aged 11 (or 13) to 18. 3,000 4,000

Sixth form colleges Day schools for children aged 16 to 18 750 1,000

Schools with boarding Schools with residential facilities. 750 1,000

*Derived from statistics for England on DfES web site for computers per school and per pupil to get pupils per primary and secondary school; this was divided into respective total school population to get number of each school type.

1.3 Description of types of spaces (excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets)

Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments to note exceptions

A Cellular office (eg for teachers)

B Classrooms and other teaching space

C Computer/server room Increasingly.

D lecture theatre Secondary schools only

E meeting room

F kitchen Snacks, reheat or hot meal preparation

G restaurant Often uses assembly space

H reception

I dry sports

J swimming pool

K teaching laboratory, workshop Secondary schools only

L residential (bedrooms, etc)

M other (please specify)

1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector

Page 264: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Schools Sector in UK

Page 2 March 2005

Name of individual Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Richard Daniels DFES Government Ministry

B ??? LEA Responsible for schools

C ??? CSE, Bristol Consultancy working on energy in schools

D ??? CREATE, Wigan NGO working on energy in schools

E Stefan Behling Foster and Partners Architects for new City Academy schools

F Ian Taylor Feilden Clegg Architects for schools

G Simon Lucas* Mouchel Parkman Outsourced school buildings managers

H ??? Schoolworks school administration software (http://www.schoolworks.co.uk/)

I ??? Partnerships for Schools Delivering Govt's new construction and refurb ambitions (http://www.p4s.org.uk)

*Head of Mouchel Academies, managing 12 City Academies, and has taken over the management of Oxfordshire's estate from Atkins

2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector 2.1 Estimate of total energy use

No schools

in Uk

Ave no/ pupils

per school*

Space per

pupil**

Estimate of total

floor area for sector

Electricity Fossil fuel

CO2

Units m² (000 m²) kWh/m²/yr kWh/m²/yr kg/m²/yr

Nursery schools 10,000 40 10 4,000 28 150 41.4Primary schools 26,000 210 10 54,600 32 164 45.9Secondary Schools 4,000 1,100 10 44,000 33 144 42.5Sixth form colleges 1,000 300 10 3,000 33 144 42.5Schools with boarding 1,000 1,100 10 11,000 85 240 84.7 TWh/year Total (mt/year) Total for sector 42,000 116,600 4.3 19.0 5.6

*Derived from statistics for England on DfES web site. **guestimate for space per pupil (from study 4.1) 2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data

Floor area

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

Gross Internal Area (GIA) in ref 5.1A, Treated Floor Area (TFA) in ref 5.1B

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy Reference 5.1C makes weather corrections. When the benchmark graph is displayed, the benchmark levels are always the same within each category. The individual school, however, may have its consumption level reduced slightly to reflect geographical location. The warmest area of the UK receives no allowance, while all the others have some level of reduction. This is calculated by assuming that 75% of the fuel consumed is used for heating, and reducing this component by multiplying it by the ratio of the annual degree days in the warmest area to the annual degree days in the area under consideration. If your school is in the warmest area, its reduction factor is one, whereas all other areas have a reduction factor of less than one. Work is currently underway to allow year on year weather corrections.

2.5 Other comments

In its background information, ref 5.1C includes benchmarks for secondary schools with a swimming pool, but this category is not in the drop-down menu of school types available when data is input.

3. Energy benchmarks available

Page 265: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Schools Sector in UK

Page 3 March 2005

3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc

Categorise as national standard, research data or other

There are 3 benchmarking references for schools, all currently available (publications: 5.1 A, B and C).

5.1A is a comprehensive guide for managing energy in existing schools.Low to medium (L-M) and medium to high (M-H) benchmarks are given for kWh/m² of school floor area for fossil fuel, electricity and carbon. Carbon factors are not given but are same as in GPG343 (see 5.1B, next para). The benchmarks are “calculated by BRECSU and based on energy records from 2,000 schools across the UK”.

5.1B is similar to, but shorter than reference 5.1A. GP, TYP and Poor Practice (PP) “interim benchmarks” are given for kWh/m² of heated floor space for fossil fuel and electricity for Primary (no swimming pool) and Secondary Schools (with and without a pool) and are “based on consumption data for 2,000 schools in England during 1999-2000”. TYP is median value of sample, GP and PP are lower and upper quartile boundaries. The benchmarks are significantly different from those in 5.1A.

CO2 emissions can be calculated using given values of kgCO2/kWh (electricity 0.52, gas 0.19, etc). Different kgCO2/kWh values are given for N. Ireland.

5.1C is a web based tool and arguably the definitive current benchmarking source for schools. The benchmark values for fossil fuel and electricity are identical to 5.1B (GPG343). For primary and secondary schools without a pool, energy benchmarks are also given for Best Practice, defined as 15th percentile and CO2 benchmarks are given for GP and TYP (although the CO2 factors seem even higher than GPG343). PP is called “Bad” Practice on the graphic (but “poor” in the information text). In its background information, ref 5.1C includes benchmarks for secondary schools with a swimming pool, but this category is not in the drop-down menu of school types available when data is input. The benchmarking tool needs to know the energy consumption of your school for one complete 365 day year. This information is obtained either from energy bills or from direct meter readings. All fuels are entered as kWh, and this figure is easily obtained from electricity and gas bills. Other fuels, or gas meter readings, may be in different units and must be converted to kWh. You can also, optionally, record the costs of each fuel used. This data is not, however, currently used by the benchmarking tool.

The other essential information that must be input is the area of the school, in square metres. It is the internal, (treated) floor area (TFA) that is required. For many schools in England and Northern Ireland, the energy and area data has already been entered into the database, using data collected by DfES.

The benchmarking tool calculates the ratio of energy consumption to floor area to give energy used per square metre. This is done for both electricity and total fossil fuel usage over the year. When you display the benchmark graphs, the actual consumption that has been entered will be corrected for geographical variations in average annual degree day figures. This ensures that a school is not penalised by being in a colder region. The degree day region for each school is determined from the first part of the school postcode. The actual benchmark figures against which this corrected consumption is compared are stored in the database.

In addition, a 4th publication 5.1D gives energy benchmarks for the design of primary and secondary schools (“DFEE guidelines”) and for operational energy. However the latter are so much higher than the benchmarks in 5.1 A, B and C that they are not credible.

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades

See DfES Building Bulletin 87 — Guidelines for Environmental Design in Schools 2003 The standards and guidance given in the 1997 version of BB87 have been largely superseded by the requirements of Part L2 of the Building Regulations and hence, this 2003 revision of BB87 has been prepared. This document being the current Constructional Standard for schools, replaces the version of Building Bulletin 87 published in 1997. All references to that document, for the purposes of compliance with Building Regulations Part F 1995 and Part L2 2002 and in the DfES Constructional Standards, are to be considered as references to this version of the Building Bulletin.

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems

Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

See DfES Building Bulletin 87 — Guidelines for Environmental Design in Schools 2003

3.5 Other

See 5.2

4. Data from building case studies

Page 266: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Schools Sector in UK

Page 4 March 2005

Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study.

Name of study Data available Date

1 PROBE of John Cabot City Technology College

A detailed review and energy audit of a secondary school which opened in 1993, published in Building Services Journal, October 1997.

1997

2 Two schools in Oxfordshire

Report from Feedback PII project, February 2004

3 Greenwich Millennium School

Report in preparation 2005

5. Publications

5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

5.1A Energy and water management: a guide for schools, DFES, May 2002

(76 pages, available on web site: http://www.dfes.gov.uk)

5.1B GPG343 Saving energy – a whole school approach, Action Energy, March 2003.

(27 pages, available on web site : http://www.thecarbontrust.co.uk)

5.1C Action Energy Benchmarking tool for schools. Current web-based tool on http://217.10.129.104/energy_benchmarking/schools

5.1D Rethinking construction, the movement for innovation sustainability working group report: Environmental performance indicators for sustainable construction. See http://www.constructingexcellence.org.uk/

5.2

5.2A

5.2B

5.2C

5.2D

5.2E

5.2F

5.2G

Low energy design guides

GIL032 Passive Solar Design - Netley Abbey Infant School

GIL033 Passive Solar Design Looe Junior and Infant School

GPCS381 Energy efficient refurbishment of schools - the achievement of Bolton Council

GPG056 Saving energy in school swimming pools. A guide to refurbishment and new pool design for headteachers, governors, and local authorities

GPG173 Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings and Extensions - for Schools and Colleges, 1997

GIL016 Using Solar Energy in Schools

Energy efficient lighting in schools, EC DG 17 Maxibrochure, 1998

5.3

5.3A

5.3B

5.3C

5.3D

5.3E

5..3F

5.3G

5.3H

5.3I

Energy efficiency/saving advice

ECG016 Saving Energy in Schools - The 'School Energy Manager's' Guide to Energy Efficiency

ECG073 Saving energy in schools. A guide for headteachers, governors, premises managers and school energy managers

GIL013 Energy Savings in Schools

GPCS099 Energy Savings in Schools - Energy Management by a school governor

GPCS100 A Teacher as the Focus for Energy Efficiency

GPCS101 How to reduce energy costs in your school by implementing simple energy energy efficiency measures

GPG055 Good Housekeeping in School Swimming Pools: A Guide for School Staff

GPG057 Conducting an Energy Walkround. A Guide for School Energy Managers Headteacher, 1995

GPG259 Saving Electrical energy in schools - good housekeeping for lighting; IT; and other curriculum based equipment

Page 267: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Schools Sector in UK

Page 5 March 2005

5.3J GPG233 Energy Efficiency in Schools - A Guide for Local Authority Chief Officers & Financial Officers

5.4 Other useful references

5.4A

5.4B

5.4C

5.4D

5.4E

ADH017 Schools Resource Pack

FL148 School Flyer

GIL147 Schools Fact Sheet

GPCS385 Energy Services at Warwickshire Schools

PAC007 Starter Pack - Schools

5.4F Energy Savings Trust: Energy Certification for Schools Scheme, available on web site: http://www.est.org.uk/schools/scheme/ This is a scheme designed to promote energy management and energy efficiency in schools through a 'Whole School Approach'. A whole school approach to energy efficiency helps to ensure the efficient use of school energy resources and to establish positive links between the school curriculum and energy efficiency. Following the simple steps of the scheme will help you produce an Energy Action Plan to deliver a co-ordinated approach to energy management, bringing together the interests and expertise of teachers, pupils, governors and parents.

Benefits from taking part in the scheme include:

• Reduced energy bills through improved energy efficiency.

• Help with curriculum resources on energy efficiency and the environment.

The scheme references 5.1A and 5.1C.

Page 268: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Sports sector in UK

Page 1 April 2005

Sector 4: Sports Centres – United Kingdom 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

The sports and leisure centre sector is considered to be providing facilities including dry sports,

swimming and leisure pools, and fitness facilities. Sports field changing rooms and ice-rinks may also be included but clearly have separate benchmark requirements. For the UK implementation of Article 7.3 it is expected that sports centres will generally fall into the category of buildings visited by the public and perceived to be publicly owned. Private sports clubs may fall outside this definition, and some fitness centres will be below 1,000m2 floor area if that is used as a lower limit for Article 7.3 in the UK.

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

The categories below are those used in ECG078.

Sub-sector category

Description - typical facilities

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Local dry sports centres Sports hall for badminton, indoor football etc., dry

changing, fitness and snack bar. 1050

Swimming pool centre Pool, wet changing and vending or snack bar. 800 Leisure pool centre Free-form pool with learning and feature area, wet

changing and café/bar. 200*

Combined centre 25m pool, learning pool, sports hall, possibly bowls or tennis, health and fitness centre, dry and wet changing and café/bar.

600*

Fitness centre Fitness studio and gym with exercise machines. Dry changing and café/bar.

2500

Sports ground changing Free standing changing room/pavilion with a club/bar room.

?

Ice rink Main hall with 50m ice pad and some spectator seating, changing and boot hire and café/bar.

65

*Total of 800 leisure centres split into two categories here 1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office Managers office B open plan office None C computer/server room None D lecture theatre None E meeting room Function room in some cases F kitchen Snack preparation only - sometimes chip frying G restaurant Vending - snack area - café H reception Small reception and desk I indoor dry sports See above (includes Bowls/tennis/squash halls) J swimming pool See above K changing facilities See above (Dry, Wet) L outdoor sports See above M Fitness gym See above

Page 269: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Sports sector in UK

Page 2 April 2005

1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector

Name of individual (if known)

Organisation represented Role of organisation

A James Fisher BRE Energy benchmarking and guidance B Lloyd Conaway Institute of Leisure Amenity

Management Sports centre management employees body

C Gerry Montgomery Institute of Sport and Recreation Management

Sports centre management employees body

D Local authority - Kirklees MBC Local authority sports centre client E Sport England Governmental F Sports management company TBA Sports centre management services

provider 2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use Number in Uk

Average floor area GIA

Estimate of total

floor area for the sector

Electricity Fossil fuel Total cost

Total CO2

Units (m²) (000 m²) kWh/m²/yr kWh/m²/yr £M kg/m²/yr Local dry sports centres 1,050 2,000 2,100 105 343 20.8 113.5Swimming pool centre 800 1,000 800 237 1336 23.3 362.9Leisure pool centre (1) 200 2,000 400 258 1321 12.0 369.7Combined centre (1) 600 2,000 1,200 152 598 18.6 183.5Fitness centre 2,500 300 750 194 449 12.0 174.6Sports ground changing (2)

1,000 230 230 164 216 2.7 116.5

Ice rink 65 2,000 130 255 217 2.2 158.5 TWh/year Total CO2

(mtonnes) Total for sector (3) 6,215 5,610 0.91 3.45 91.6 1.1Notes: (1) Leisure and combined pool total of 800 has been split into two here (2) Sports ground changing floor ares is estimated here (3) Total cost of £90M contrasts with quoted £700M total in ECG078 ! (4) Total CO2 of 1.1 mtonnes contrasts with quoted 10 mtonnes total in ECG078 !

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data e.g. floor area, volume, other

Gross internal floor area provides a default metric. Swimming pools are usually categorised by metres length and lanes (25m five lane). Sports halls are usually categorised by the number of badminton courts (four or six court).

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation Gross internal floor area from the design process.

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy Benchmark Guide 51 (1996) provides no weather normalisation. Benchmark guide 78 (2000-current) provides three different zones: Scotland, South of England, and the rest.

2.5 Other comments

Page 270: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Sports sector in UK

Page 3 April 2005

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available e.g. Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree e.g. sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other Benchmark guide 78 (2000) has seven categories as tabled above and provides the standard benchmarks and benchmarks customised for typically 15 parameters building, services, features, location and level of use. Benchmark guide 87 (2004) lists 15 categories of local authority buildings including three sports and leisure (Dry sports centre, small pool, and leisure centre with pool). The benchmark levels for these three building types are the same as the Guide 78 values.. The older Benchmark Guide 51 has three broad categories of centre (centre without a pool, swimming pool centre and a combined facility) and no adjustment procedures.

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades Construction has to be to Building Regulations Part L2 . Sport England provide guidance on design and energy efficiency and also provide standardised design such as “Optimum sports hall” and Optimum Pool”. CIBSE Guide on low energy design in swimming pools.

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems E.g. heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1 Effective management of energy in sports centres - Case study of Kirklees

Metropolitan Council (GPCS360)

2 Daylighting for sports halls - two case studies (GIR035) 3 Energy efficiency in sports and recreation buildings - Condensing gas boilers.

Three case studies (GPCS043)

4 Energy Efficiency in Sports and Recreation Buildings: Swimming Pool Covers Case study (GPCS076)

Page 271: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Sports sector in UK

Page 4 April 2005

5. Publications Please include date and language if not English 5.1

Energy benchmarks for existing buildings Energy use in sports and recreation buildings (ECG078) Carbon Trust 2000. Energy efficiency in sports and recreation buildings - a guide for owners and energy managers (ECG051) Carbon Trust 1996. Energy Use in Local Authority Buildings (ECG087) Carbon Trust 2004.

5.2 Low energy design guides Sports and recreation centres - specifying for energy efficiency in CCT documents – a client/owner's guide (GIL037) Carbon Trust. Optimum Sports Hall. Sport England 2002. Optimum Pool. Sport England 2003.

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice Energy Efficiency in Sports and Recreation Buildings - Effective Plant Maintenance (GPG137)

5.4 Other useful references

Key: HSG - Health Service Guidelines HFN - Health Facilities Note GPG - Good Practice Guide GPCS - Good Practice Case Studies ECG - Energy Consumption Guide GIL - General Information Reports

Page 272: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Health sector in UK

Page 1 March 2005

Sector 5: Hospitals and other Health Facilities – United Kingdom 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

For the purposes of this review the health sector is considered to be the National Health Service

(NHS), which is the UK’s publicly-funded health care institution, covering everything from doctors’ surgeries and primary care clinics, up to large teaching and acute care hospitals. The NHS is composed of several hundred health care trusts, each with its own budget and performance targets agreed with government: 15 in Wales, 11 in Northern Ireland, 25 in Scotland and over 300 in England. Estates guidance and other technical support to the trusts is similarly devolved to the regions, with Welsh Health Estates in Wales, Health Estates in NI, the Property and Environment Forum in Scotland and NHS Estates in England (note that NHS Estates is being dissolved in September 2005, with key policy setting and other central estates functions being taken up by the Department of Health). Data on estates condition, including energy consumption, is reported annually. In England, the ERIC database is used to manage this data and extract summary reports, including reports on progress to energy targets. Each of the devolved administrations operates a similar estates database for their respective NHS trusts. However energy information is provided on a whole-site basis, which means that breaking consumption down to particular buildings and activities within a site is usually not possible. This factor, together with the lack of submetering, may lead to difficulties in implementing the anticipated EPBD labelling methodology.

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

The first four categories below are those used in GPG72, but need updating to reflect current status of the NHS estate. Also additional activity categories need to characterize the sector: some suggestions included below. However, further discussion and consensus will be needed to agree this since buy in is needed from all devolved administrations. NHSE recognise that this information will be needed for EPBD, but have not begun to work out how they might extract this information from their databases. NHS property databases do not hold data on numbers of buildings >1,000m2, but the Valuation Office Agency (part of the Inland Revenue, responsible for compiling and maintaining the business rating and council tax valuation lists for England and Wales) surveyed the NHS estate in 2004 and has individual building details in their database. VOA shows a total number of buildings >1,000m2 in the NHS estate (in England) of 5,527, of which 4,440 are held by NHS trusts (the balance is primary care facilities, clinics, etc). The total number of buildings in the UK below is based on the 5,527 figure for England, assuming that the English NHS trusts account for 85% of the total.

Sub-sector category

Description

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Teaching hospital Acute hospital Cottage hospital Long stay hospital Doctors surgeries Health centres/clinics Diagnostic/treatment centres TOTAL UK 6,500

Page 273: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Health sector in UK

Page 2 March 2005

1.3 Description of types of spaces (excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets)

Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A Cellular office B Open plan office C Computer/server room D Lecture theatre E Meeting room F Kitchen G Restaurant H Reception I Research laboratory J Swimming pool K Operating theatre L Wards (overnight accommodation) M Other 1 (please specify) 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Lorraine Brayford Dept of Health, Engineering Policy setting and support to NHS England (currently within NHS Estates)

B Brian Latham Dept of Health, Engineering Works with LB on technical issues C Chris Hall Building Research Establishment Good practice guidance and research D Chris Le Breton Independent consultant Research into estates data/benchmarks E Patricia Donan Health Estates NI E Eric Thomas Welsh Health Estates Policy setting and support to NHS Wales F Derek McCullough Energy Mgt Services In-house NHS consultancy (needs paying) G Eddie McLaughlin or

John Dunlop NHS Property & Env’t Forum (Scot) Policy setting and support to NHS Scotland

J Brian Spires Gibbs PFI hospital engineering designer K Dale Sager Carillion PFI hospitals Recommendation is that the advisory group be based on the Environment Policy Forum, which comprises Chris Hall, Lorraine Brayford, Eddie McLaughlin, Eric Thomas and Patricia Donan. 2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector 2.1 Estimate of total energy use

Figures based on 2003/04 data extracted from ERIC – which covers England only – increased pro rata for the UK (Assuming England accounts for 85% of the UK total). Unsure whether Electricity consumption figure includes CHP generation.

ENOUGH CATEGORIES?

Estimate of total floor area for the

sector

Electricity

Fossil fuel

District heating Total CO2

Units (000 m²) (000 GJ/yr) (000 GJ/yr) (mtonnes/yr) General hospital

Day care centre

Doctors’ surgery

Sub-sector 4

Total for sector

30,400 14,600 39,200 Included in FF 3.9

Page 274: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Health sector in UK

Page 3 March 2005

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data eg floor area, volume, other GJ/100m3

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation

GJ of delivered energy per 100 cubic metres of heated volume

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy Degree day correction

2.5 Other comments GJ/100m3 metric is out of line with all other UK benchmarks, which are based on kWh/m2 treated floor area. Some trusts have improved performance simply by taking out false ceilings and increasing building heated volume. Also benchmark data from GPG72 is well out of date. NHS has targets set in 2001 of 35-55 GJ/100m3 for newbuild, 55-65 GJ/100m3 for existing buildings, and 15% energy/carbon absolute reduction target to be achieved by 2010. Although policy and target setting is devolved to the regions, Wales, Scotland and NI have adopted the same targets as for England. Difficulty using benchmarks generally in the health sector due to: • wide range of activities in health sector buildings, with wide range in energy intensity • frequent change of activity type from year to year within the same building • increasing activity levels and number of energy consuming clinical equipment • problems breaking down energy use to assign to specific activities/buildings due to lack of

submetering and no recent analysis of historical data Against a background of 3-5% growth in actual estate size per annum. Current thinking is that the hospital types in GPG72 are too crude and no longer reflect the diversity of types and usage mix in the NHS and that a new typology of up to 10 categories may be needed. Furthermore, the original classification of buildings into categories was not necessarily based on systematic criteria: for example, a hospital might be categorized “acute” even though only 10% of its facilities are for acute services. Thus comparison within usage categories becomes difficult. A more formal set of criteria for categorization needs to be developed, coupled with revised list of categories, then linked to consistent and reliable data, for a more definitive and useful benchmark approach to be developed. At the moment a piecemeal approach is being taken: the NHS in Scotland developing a tailored benchmark approach based on activity type (ie, eight separate components: theatres, laundries, etc) as a way of improving accuracy of benchmark. Builds up tailored benchmark based on activity type GP benchmark and floor area (Energy Monitoring and Targeting System, available from SEEP Forum website), so that each hospital has a unique signature benchmark. Extension of this approach to the entire UK is under discussion. GPG72 was largely based on Scottish data in the first place, since this data was in a more readily usable format. WHE in Wales have commissioned ESD to develop an Estates Energy Model which breaks down main metered energy usage to buildings and departments based on activities, but uses GPG72 benchmarks and categories. NHS Estates in England have commissioned work to assess the viability of existing estates data to develop more useful benchmarks.

Page 275: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Health sector in UK

Page 4 March 2005

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available eg Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree eg sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other GPG72 is main guidance on Good/Best Practice, but out of date, both in terms of base data used to develop benchmarks, and also on the current state of energy intensity in the various activity areas within the NHS (eg, diagnostic centres did not exist when GPG72 was written, but are highly energy intensive). The GPG72 benchmarks in GJ/100m3 have been transformed into kWh/m²/yr in CIBSE Guide F 2004 edition (see attached table) assuming a ceiling height of 2.9m. There is data in the estates return databases (from England plus the regions) which can be used to work out the performance benchmark in GJ/100m3. However, this is at a relatively crude level, being for the whole trust or at best a whole site. Data at a more disaggregated level may exist within individual trusts, although since this will be from main metered sources in most cases, and main meters do not necessarily cover rationally organised areas of a site (eg, not aligned with building or departmental boundaries), then the sub-site benchmarks do not necessarily make much sense either. There is the beginnings of the development of a tailored benchmark approach, driven by the PEF in Scotland who seem to be the most organised wrt a systematic approach to energy improvements.

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades Bregs L2 and NHS energy target benchmarks as above

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems Eg heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1 2004/05 study into benchmarks for specific building/activity types in the UK

health sector (Chris Le Breton research listed below) To be published end March 2005

Mar 2005

2 GPCS 129 Energy efficiency in hospitals by good housekeeping - Somerset Health Authority

3 GPCS 196 Electricity savings in a large acute hospital. Hull Royal Infirmary 4 GPCS 197 Electricity savings in hospitals. Airedale General Hospital 5 GPCS 198 Electricity savings in hospitals. Newcastle Health Authority 6 GPCS 199 Energy savings in hospitals. Two NHS trusts 7 GPCS 200 Energy savings in hospitals. Somerset Health Authority 8 GPCS 202 Energy savings in hospitals. Pinderfields Hospital 9 Low energy hospital reports on St Mary’s Hospital, Isle of Wight & Wansbeck

General (NHS Estates)

Page 276: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Health sector in UK

Page 5 March 2005

5. Publications Please include date and language if not English 5.1 Energy benchmarks for existing buildings

• Energy consumption in hospitals (ECG072): benchmarks for 4 hospital types (but out of date) • Research into more specific and up-to-date benchmarks being carried out by Chris Le Breton

under contract to DoH; final report due 20 March 2005, will feed into updated ENCODE which is due to be finalized by end 2005 (see 5.2)

• NEAT (NHS Environmental Assessment Tool) CD: includes a methodology for producing a score based on energy consumption

• Corporate Greencode (Scotland): does what NEAT does, but provides a management system not just a snapshot score – ie, a fully integrated environmental mgt system

5.2 Low energy design guides

• ENCODE (NHS Estates): energy saving measures, guidance on BEMS, standards, etc

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice • Residential Homes Fact Sheet (GIL145) • Healthcare Fact Sheet (GIL146): doctor’s surgeries • Starter Pack - Healthcare (PAC006): aimed at building users • Carbon/Energy Management in Healthcare – Best Practice Advice for the NHS in England On

Meeting The Mandatory Reduction Targets (Nov 2004)

5.4 Other useful references • Introduction to Energy Efficiency in Health Care Buildings (EEBPp, 1994, rev 1997) • A strategic approach to energy and environmental management (GPG376): not health-sector

specific • HSG(96)32) Contract Energy Management • HFN 03 Effective heat & power strategies for healthcare premises; • EEBPP: GPG 186 Developing an effective energy policy • EEBPP: GPG 54 Electricity savings in hospitals. A guide for energy and estate managers • GPG 52 Good housekeeping in the NHS. A guide for energy and estate managers; • GPCS 40 Energy Efficiency in hospitals condensing gas boilers; • GPCS 75 Energy efficiency in the health sector -potential benefits of boiler replacement; • EEBPP: GHG Reducing energy waste in the NHS • GIL 51 An energy cost performance indicator • NHS Estates A strategic guide to combined heat and power • HFN 03 Effective heat & power strategies for healthcare premises • EEBPP Combined Heat and Power for Hospitals; • GPG 60 The application of CHP in the health service • GPG 1 Guidance notes for the implementation of small scale Packaged CHP; • GPG 115 An environmental guide to CHP • GPG 116 Environmental aspects of large-scale CHP; chp-sizer (hotline no.0800 585794) • Building Regulations Energy Efficiency Provisions Part L2 • EEBPP GPG 206 Energy efficient refurbishment of hospitals • NHS Estates Model engineering Specification • NHS Estates has produced a document Carbon/Energy Management - best practice advice for the

NHS in England on meeting the mandatory carbon/energy targets - March 2000 - March 2010. This is now available on the Agency's Knowledge Information Portal under Energy.

Key: HSG - Health Service Guidelines HFN - Health Facilities Note GPG - Good Practice Guide GPCS - Good Practice Case Studies ECG - Energy Consumption Guide GIL - General Information Reports

Page 277: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Hotels sector in UK

Page 1 April 2005

Hotels and restaurant sector – United Kingdom 1 Description of sector 1.1 Description of the sector in your country and how EPBD Article 7.3 will be applied to it

The Hotels sector comprises business and holiday hotels and guest houses. As hotels are not publicly

owned and not perceived to be in public ownership, it is unlikely that they will fall into the first tranche of building types to require mandatory certification under article 7.3. The restaurant sector includes a variety of premises type - it is unlikely that a significant proportion will be over 1000 m2.

1.2 Description of established sub-sectors

The hotel categories below are those used in the Hospitable Climates benchmarking, which are derived from the categories used in Energy Consumption Guide 36. The restaurant categories are those used in the 1994 publication Introduction to Energy Efficiency in Catering Establishments (which is no longer made available or supported by the Carbon Trust). Related sectors not included in this appraisal include

Holiday parks Amusement parks Conference and meetings venues Clubs Residential healthcare premises Local authority residential premises

Sub-sector category

Description - typical facilities

Estimate of total number of buildings

over 1,000 m² Large luxury hotel Typically in a city centre location; it might, for

example, be of Edwardian grandeur or modern. The reception and circulation areas are generous and there are restaurant, conference and leisure facilities. The average floor area is likely to be between 70 and 90 square metres per bedroom. The number of bedrooms ranges from 100 to 500, or more.

1000

Medium hotel This will be a three or four star hotel catering principally for the business or holiday trade. There is likely to be a restaurant, conference rooms and leisure facilities. The average floor area is likely to be in a relatively narrow band of 40 to 60 square metres per bedroom. The size is generally between 50 and 150 bedrooms.

3000

Small hotel Usually this will be a two star hotel occupying an older, probably converted, building, usually having between 20 and 100 bedrooms. The floor area can vary widely, and room sizes tend to be large, giving an average floor area of around 60 to 70 square metres per bedroom. The facilities will vary between hotels [but conference and extensive leisure facilities are not usually present].

5500

Restaurant with bar Restaurant with bar (15,000) Fast food restaurant Fast food restaurant (10,000) Note - (1) total of 9500 hotels from H Bruhns split into three categories above. Guest houses and are assumed to be below the 1000 m2 limit but this should be confirmed.

Page 278: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Hotels sector in UK

Page 2 April 2005

(2) total of 25,000 restaurants and wine bars are all likely to be less than 1,000 m2 and are split here into two categories - to be confirmed. 1.3 Description of types of spaces

(excluding storage, circulation, stairs, lifts, toilets) Main elements of schedule of accommodation Comments A cellular office Managers office in medium and larger hotels B open plan office None C computer/server room None D residential (bedrooms, etc) E meeting room Meeting or function rooms in some cases F kitchen Most hotels have a catering kitchen G restaurant Most hotels have a restaurant or breakfast room H reception Reception foyer and desk I indoor dry sports Fitness gym increasingly popular J swimming pool Small swimming pools are increasingly common K retail outlets L bar M Wet changing For swimming pool if present 1.4 Describe possible existing people, Committees, organisations etc which might act as or need to be

represented on an Advisory Group for the EPLabel project for this sector Name of individual

(if known) Organisation represented Role of organisation

A Vernon Ryan BRE Energy benchmarking and guidance B Claire Lalaguna,

network co-ordinator Hotel Catering International Management Association (HCIMA)

Association of Hospitality, Tourism and Leisure Management Professionals

C Jacky Pett Association of Conservation of Energy Have current proposal to PEET D John Forte Hotel company - TBA E Rebecca Hawkins Oxford Brookes University Adviser to HCIMA F Reiner Boehme IHEI 2. National energy data for the sector or sub-sector

2.1 Estimate of total energy use Numb

er in Uk

Average floor area GIA

Total floor area for

the sector

Electricity Fossil fuel Total cost (2)

Total CO2

Units (m²) (000 m²) kWh/m²/yr kWh/m²/yr £M kg/m²/yr

Large luxury hotel with a/c 500 5,000 2,500 220 500 45.3 196.2Large luxury hotel no a/c 500 5,000 2,500 150 460 34.4 156.4Medium hotel 3,000 2,500 7,500 140 400 93.8 140.4Small hotel 5,500 1,000 5,500 120 360 60.1 123.6Restaurant with bar 15,000 150 2,250 730 1250 124.1 573.3Fast food restaurant 10,000 150 1,500 890 670 85.5 536.7 TWh/year mtonnes Total for sector 34,500 630 21,750 5.61 11.20 443.1 4.7Notes: (1) Hotels and motels has been split into four groups here (2) Costs are on a nominal basis of 5.5 p/kWh for elctricity and 1.2 p/kWh for fossil energy. (3) total of 25,000 restaurants and wine bars are all likely to be less than 1,000 m2 and are split here into two categories - to be confirmed.

Page 279: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Hotels sector in UK

Page 3 April 2005

2.2 Metric normally used for normalisation of energy data e.g. floor area, volume, other Hotel size is invariably indicated by the number of bedrooms or beds. Gross internal floor area provides a default metric which is related to the number of rooms in the benchmarking guides (see section 1.2 above). Restaurant size is often indicated by the number of covers but no relationship to building floor area has been identified in the benchmark literature.

2.3 Definition of metric for normalisation Gross internal floor area from the design process.

2.4 Common procedure (if any) for weather normalisation of heating and cooling energy Benchmark Guide 36 (1993) provides no weather normalisation. The HCIMA Hospitable Climates “Heat” on line benchmarking procedure does not appear to provide any weather normalisation, but this has not been confirmed. Introduction to Energy Efficiency in Catering Establishments provides no weather normalisation in the main procedure but an appendix describes the NPI procedure which includes normalisation of heating by degree days.

2.5 Other comments

3. Energy benchmarks available 3.1 Describe what is available e.g. Mean or Typical values, Good or Best Practice, etc

Comment on pedigree e.g. sample size, vintage, accuracy, comprehensiveness etc Categorise as national standard, research data or other Benchmark Guide 36 provides energy benchmarks for three categories of hotel as listed above, and separate allowance (10% extra for heating and 50% for electricity) for air conditioning in luxury hotels. The HCIMA Hospitable Climates procedure provides a benchmarking procedure which requests considerable data for the type, use and servicing of the hotel, however the benchmarks do not appear to vary other than by the main hotel type. The Introduction to Energy Efficiency in Catering Establishments (no longer available) provides fossil and electric benchmark data for two types of restaurant as listed above.

3.2 Describe Standards for new buildings, refurbishments and upgrades Construction has to be to Building Regulations Part L2. No sector-related design standards has been identified.

3.4 Describe Standards for building services systems E.g. heating, cooling, lighting installed loads, ventilation fan power, etc

3.5 Other

Page 280: National Review - Belgium · 2014-08-11 · EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data in BELGIUM Page 6 February 2005 4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or

EPLabel WP2: Review of benchmarks and energy data for Hotels sector in UK

Page 4 April 2005

4. Data from building case studies Describe robust and/or published studies which might contribute to the development of benchmarks. It is suggested that the list is limited to ten studies, but please state if more are available. Multi-building studies should normally be described as a single study. Name of study Data available Date 1 Energy Efficiency in Hotels - Occupancy-Linked Controls (GPCS260) in three

case study hotels. Consumption and savings

2 Energy efficiency in hotels - energy management of a hotel group (GPCS279). Energy management in the Swallow Hotel Group.

Overview

3 The Munich Park Hilton Hotel - Germany. Energy costs controlled as part of an Environmental Management programme (GPCS296). A range of measures in a large hotel.

Consumption and savings

4 The Derwentwater Hotel; Keswick; United Kingdom (GPCS297) Consumption and savings

5. Publications Please include date and language if not English 5.1

Energy benchmarks for existing buildings Energy Efficiency in Hotels: A Guide for Owners and Managers (ECG036) HCIMA Hospitable Climates “Heat” on-line benchmarking and reporting scheme for hotels at www.hospitableclimates.org.uk , or via the Carbon Trust benchmarking page or www.thecarbontrust.co.uk/energy/pages/page_66.asp. [No longer available:] Introduction to Energy Efficiency in Catering Establishments, DEFRA 1994 (discontinued).

5.2 Low energy design guides CHP in Hotels – a guide for hotel owners and managers (GPG384).

5.3 Energy efficiency/saving advice See section 4.

5.4 Other useful references

Key: GPG - Good Practice Guide GPCS - Good Practice Case Studies ECG - Energy Consumption Guide GIL - General Information Reports